2018 Nissan Frontier | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Frontier Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 502 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 Nissan Frontier Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM18EA 0D40U1
Table of Contents
Owner's Manual Supplement

2018 FRONTIER

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement revises or adds the following

information in the 2018 Frontier Owner’s Manual:

∙Checking tire pressure in the “Do-it-yourself” section.

∙Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire) in the “Do-it-yourself”

section.

∙Wheels and tires in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

∙Towing a trailer in the “Technical and consumer information” section.

Please read carefully and keep in the vehicle.

Printing: September 2017

Publication No. SU18EA 0D40U0

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire

Inflation

Pressure

Front Original Tire:

235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Rear Original Tire:

235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire: 240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full

size spare that is a different size or brand

than the tires originally installed on the ve-

hicle. This full size spare tire is intended for

temporary use only and should be re-

placed at the first opportunity.

LDI0393

Observe the following precautions if the

FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle

could be damaged or involved in an acci-

dent:

WARNING

To help reduce the risk of a crash which

may result in personal injury or death:

∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire

should be used for emergency use

only. It should be replaced with the

standard tire at the first opportunity

to avoid possible tire or differential

damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving. The vehicle driving perfor-

mance may be affected when driving

on wet or snow covered roads.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire is installed, the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) will normally not

be affected.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire is installed, the following

systems may not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

– Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)

(if so equipped)

∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure.

Always keep the TEMPORARY FULL

SIZE spare tire inflated to the pressure

specification shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice,the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire should be used on the front

wheels and the original tire used on

the rear wheels. Use tire chains only

on the drive wheels.

∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire on other vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the same

time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Offset in

(mm) Size

Steel 0.79 (20) 15 x 6.5JJ

Steel 1.18 (30) 16 x 7JJ

Aluminum 1.18 (30) 16 x 7J

Aluminum 1.18 (30) 18 x 7.5J

Tires Size

235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

Spare tire Size

Steel Full size

Alloy 16” Full size

Alloy 18” P265/70R16

WARNING

∙ Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely af-

fect vehicle handling, braking and

performance and may lead to

accidents.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 mile (805 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could

be damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your vehicle

wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo.

Remember that towing a trailer places ad-

ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,

drive train, steering, braking and other sys-

tems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-

able on the website at

www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability and

the special equipment required for proper

towing.

TOWING A TRAILER

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

When you require any service or have any

questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for

conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive

models, a mark is placed at the be-

ginning of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss

of control or a collision. For additional

information, refer to “Driving safety pre-

cautions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passen-

ger car because it has a higher center

of gravity for off-road use. As with

other vehicles with features of this

type, failure to operate this vehicle

correctly may result in loss of control

or an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all

features and equipment available on this

model. Features and equipment in your ve-

hicle may vary depending on model, trim

level, options selected, order, date of pro-

duction, region or availability. Therefore,

you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or in-

stalled on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at

the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the

right to change specifications, perfor-

mance, design or component suppliers

without notice and without obligation.

From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with

the most accurate information currently

available. Please carefully read and retain

with this manual all revision updates sent

to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac-

cess to accurate and up-to-date informa-

tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver-

sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner

section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide

If you have questions concerning any infor-

mation in your Owner’s Manual, contact

NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact in-

formation, refer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER

CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner’s

Manual.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illus-

tration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm.

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle

can expose you to chemicals including

engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known

to the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the en-

gine except as necessary, service your

vehicle in a well-ventilated area and

wear gloves or wash your hands fre-

quently when servicing your vehicle.

For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

APD1005

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer to

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon and

Bosch.

SiriusXM® services

require a subscrip-

tion after trial pe-

riod and are sold

separately or as a

package. The

satellite service is

available only in

the 48 contiguous

USA and DC.

SiriusXM® satellite

service is also

available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights....................0-10

1. Rear seat belts (P. 1-15)

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-74)

3. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-10)

4. Front seat belts with pretension-

er(s) and shoulder height adjuster

(P. 1-15, 1-74)

5. Supplemental front-impact air

bags (P.1-74)

6. Seats (P. 1-2)

7. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P. 1-74)

8. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-74)

9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (P. 1-28)

10. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-28)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2310

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Engine hood (P. 3-10)

2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)

3. Windshield (P. 8-20)

4. Windows (P. 2-49)

5. Door locks (P. 3-3)

Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-6)

Keys (P. 3-2)

6. Mirrors (P. 3-15)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-31)

8. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)

Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system (if so equipped) (P. 2-29)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-29)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2481

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear sliding window

(if so equipped) (P. 2-49)

2. Vehicle loading (P. 10-20)

Tailgate (P. 3-18)

Truck box (P. 3-18)

Rearview camera (P. 4-10)

3. Towing (if so equipped) (P. 10-30)

4. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-42)

5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-27)

6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-11)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LIC3975

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power moonroof

(if so equipped) (P. 2-52)

2. Map lights (P. 2-54)

3. Sun visors (P. 3-14)

4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-15)

HomeLink® universal trans-

ceiver (if so equipped) (P. 2-55)

5. Glove box (P. 2-40)

6. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

7. Cup holders (P. 2-40)

8. Console box (P. 2-40)

9. Spare tire tools location (P. 6-3)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2483

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-17)

2. Headlight/fog light

(if so equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control (P. 4-72)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System (P. 4-80, 4-92)

4. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-74)

Horn (P. 2-33)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-14)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-22)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)

8. Storage (P. 2-40)

9. Audio system (P. 4-31)

10. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-74)

11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)

12. Passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-74)

13. USB connection port (P. 4-59)

AUX input (P. 4-59)

14. Power outlets (P. 2-39)

LII2484

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

Heated seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-34)

Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-39)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch (P. 2-35)

16. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-26)

18. Climate controls (P. 4-17, P. 4-26)

19. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

20. Ignition switch (P. 5-10)

21. Tilt steering wheel control

(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)

22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)

Clutch interlock (clutch start)

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)

Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)

Outside mirror controls

(if so equipped) (P. 3-15)

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

QR25DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)

2. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)

3. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

4. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

6. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

7. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

11. Battery (P. 8-14)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

WDI0643

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)

2. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-22)

3. Fuse box (P. 8-22)

4. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

5. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

6. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

8. Drive belt location (P.8-16)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

11. Battery (P. 8-14)

12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

*Engine cover removed for clarity.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII0167

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning

light

Name Page

4WD warning light

(model)

2-15

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-15

Automatic

transmission oil

temperature

warning light

(if so equipped)

2-16

Automatic trans-

mission park

warning light

(model)

2-16

Brake warning

light

2-16

Warning

light

Name Page

Charge

warning light

2-17

Door open

warning light

2-17

Engine oil pres-

sure warning light

2-17

Low fuel

warning light

2-18

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-18

Low windshield-

washer fluid

warning light

(if so equipped)

2-20

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-20

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-20

Indicator

light

Name Page

4WD shift

indicator light

(model)

2-21

Automatic trans-

mission position

indicator light

(if so equipped)

2-21

Cruise main

switch indicator

light

2-21

Cruise set switch

indicator light

2-21

Electronic locking

rear differential

(E-Lock) system

ON indicator light

(if so equipped)

2-21

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-21

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Indicator

light

Name Page

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-21

Hill descent

control system

ON indicator light

(if so equipped)

2-21

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

2-22

Overdrive OFF

indicator light

(if so equipped)

2-23

Security indicator

light (if so

equipped)

2-23

Slip indicator light 2-23

Transfer 4LO posi-

tion indicator light

(model)

2-23

Indicator

light

Name Page

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-24

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-24

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats............................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ............................... 1-5

Rear bench seat (if so equipped).............. 1-6

Jump seat (if so equipped).....................1-7

Armrest (if so equipped) .......................1-7

Flexible seating ................................1-7

Head restraints/headrests ......................1-10

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .................................1-11

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components........................1-12

Remove......................................1-12

Install.........................................1-13

Adjust ........................................1-13

Front-seat active head restraints .............1-14

Seatbelts.......................................1-15

Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-15

Seat belt warning light........................1-18

Pregnant women.............................1-18

Injured persons...............................1-18

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor .....................................1-18

Seat belt extenders..........................1-24

Seat belt maintenance ......................1-25

Child safety.....................................1-25

Infants ......................................1-26

Small children ...............................1-26

Larger children ..............................1-27

Child restraints .................................1-28

Precautions on child restraints ..............1-28

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system .............................1-31

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH (Crew Cab models) .............1-35

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH — jump seat

(King Cab® models).......................... 1-37

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts (Crew Cab models).......1-41

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts — jump seat

(King Cab® models)..........................1-44

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH

(Crew Cab models) ..........................1-48

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH — jump seat

(King Cab® models)..........................1-52

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts —

front passenger and rear bench seat

(Crew Cab models) ..........................1-56

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts —

front passenger and jump seats

(King Cab® models)...........................1-61

Booster seats ...............................1-68

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........... 1-74

Precautions on SRS.......................... 1-74

Supplemental air bag warning labels ........1-89

Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-90

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the lever up and hold it while you slide

the seat forward or backward to the de-

sired position. Release the lever to lock the

seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

WRS0175 WRS0176

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position

with the parking brake fully applied.

Seat lifter (if so equipped for

driver’s seat)

Turn either dial to adjust the angle and

height of the seat cushion to the desired

position.

Lumbar support (if so equipped

for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Move the lever forward or backward to ad-

just the seat lumbar area.

WRS0131 WRS0389

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during operation, wait

30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the en-

gine is off. This will discharge the bat-

tery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch as shown will slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch as shown until the

desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position

with the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2897

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

angle and height of the seat cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Move the lever forward or backward to ad-

just the seat lumbar area.

REAR BENCH SEAT (if so equipped)

The rear bench seat is non-adjustable.

However, the seats can be folded up and

folded to lay flat. For additional information,

refer to “Flexible seating” in this section.

LRS2898 WRS0389 LRS2903

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

JUMP SEAT (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not use a child restraint in the driv-

er’s side jump seat. This seating posi-

tion is not suitable for child restraint

installation. A child restraint can be in-

stalled in the passenger’s side jump

seat when the seat extension is un-

folded from the seat base.

∙ When folding the jump seat, be careful

not to squeeze your finger between

the seat cushion and the body side.

ARMREST (if so equipped)

To use the center armrest on the rear

bench seat, pull on the tab in the center of

the seat and fold it down as shown.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seats when

they are in the fold-down position.In a

collision, people riding in these areas

without proper restraints are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-

eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is

clear before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or

feet to get caught or pinched in the

seat.

∙ Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may pro-

vide significant protection against in-

jury in an accident. Always replace

and adjust them properly if they have

been removed for any reason.

∙ If the head restraints/headrests are

removed for any reason, they should

be securely stored to prevent them

from causing injury to passengers or

damage to the vehicle in case of sud-

den braking or an accident.

LRS0556 LRS2901

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

Folding the rear bench seat up

(if so equipped)

To fold the rear bench seat up:

1. Lift up on the lever, located on the side

of the seat, while lifting the front of the

seat cushion up.

2. Fold the bottom of the seat cushion

toward the back of the vehicle until it

locks in place.

LRS2475 LRS2476

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Repeat this process to raise and secure

the seat cushion on the other side of

the vehicle for maximum storage ca-

pacity.

To return the rear bench seat to a seating

position, reverse the process. Make sure to

properly push the seat cushion down

into place.

WARNING

∙ When the vehicle is being used to

carry cargo, properly secure all cargo

to help prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks.In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts. Be sure ev-

eryone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly. Never ride

in the rear seat unless the seat bot-

tom cushions are in place and latched.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

A. Child restraint anchor points

Folding the rear bench seat down

(if so equipped)

The rear bench seatback can be tilted for-

ward to access the child restraint anchor

point locations or the jacking equipment.

To tilt the seatback forward, pull the strap

up 䊊

1and tilt the seatback. The child re-

straint anchor points can be accessed be-

hind the rear bench seatback. The jacking

equipment can be accessed from behind

the passenger’s side seatback.

LRS2477 LRS2478

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

WARNING

Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seat when it is in the

fold-down position. Use of these areas

by passengers without proper re-

straints could result in serious injury or

death in an accident or sudden stop.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

Crew Cab

LRS2361

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head restraints/

headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

King Cab®

LRS2362 LRS2300

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches) 䊊

1must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

FRONT-SEAT ACTIVE HEAD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙ Always adjust the head restraints

properly as specified in this section.

Failure to do so can reduce the effec-

tiveness of the active head restraint.

∙ Active head restraints are designed to

supplement other safety systems. Al-

ways wear seat belts. No system can

prevent all injuries in any accident.

LRS2305 LRS2306 SPA1025

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Do not attach anything to the head

restraint stalks. Doing so could impair

active head restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forward

utilizing the force that the seatback re-

ceives from the occupant in a rear-end col-

lision. The movement of the head restraint

helps support the occupant’s head by re-

ducing its backward movement and help-

ing absorb some of the forces that may

lead to whiplash-type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for col-

lisions at low to medium speeds in which it

is said that whiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in cer-

tain rear-end collisions. After the collision,

the head restraints return to their original

positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints

as described in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front

seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-

ing light. The warning light, located on the

instrument panel, will show the status of

the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

LRS0786

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt. Fastening the seat belts

(front seats all models and rear

seats Crew Cab models)

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

WRS0175

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move, and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2897 LRS2674

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions’ three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant,the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

Fastening the seat belts ( jump

seats for King Cab® models)

1. Open the jump seat. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Seats” in this sec-

tion.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the seat

belt to move, and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothly

pull the belt out of the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The jump seat position’s three-point seat

belts have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the passengers

some freedom of movement in the seat.

LRS0556 LRS2723 LRS2724

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The ELR locks the seat belt when the ve-

hicle slows down rapidly or during certain

impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant,the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

WRS0139

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the lap/

shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the

driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

LRS0242

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

∙If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraint

∙ Forward-facing child restraint

∙ Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat if available (Crew Cab models). Stud-

ies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN

recommends that infants be placed in child

restraints that comply with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose

a child restraint that fits your vehicle and

always follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

LRS2690

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Do not install rear-facing child re-

straints in the driver’s side rear

seating position.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– For forward-facing child seats and

boosters, DO NOT install if the child

restraint base extends past the

forward edge of the seat cushion.

– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front

seat. If you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front

seat, refer to “Forward-facing child

restraint installation using the seat

belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could se-

riously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorage,and a child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a

collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat (King Cab®

models).

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, refer to

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs., (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehi-

cle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are pro-

vided to install child restraints in the rear

outboard seating positions only. Do not at-

tempt to install a child restraint in the cen-

ter position using the LATCH lower an-

chors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position us-

ing the LATCH lower anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

LATCH system lower anchor locations

(Crew Cab models)

LRS2962

LATCH system lower anchor locations

(King Cab® models)

LRS2963

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located as

shown. A label is attached to the seatback

(Crew Cab models) to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location

LRS0748

LATCH label locations (Crew Cab models)

LRS2984

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

Top tether anchor

WARNING

∙ Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a

collision. A child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following

locations:

∙ On the back of the front passenger seat

(King Cab® models) as shown.

∙ Under the rear window behind the rear

bench seat (Crew Cab models) as

shown. 1. Cover plate

2. Routing bracket

3. Anchor point

∙ On the floor between the jump seat belt

buckles in the center of the vehicle (King

Cab® models) as shown.

The anchor point is located on the floor

between the jump seat belt buckles in the

center of the vehicle. The routing bracket is

located behind the cover plate under the

rear window above the jump seat.

Front passenger seat (King Cab® models)

LRS0572

Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)

LRS0393

Jump seats

(King Cab® models - passenger side shown)

LRS2101

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

(Crew Cab models)

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint in the rear seats using the

LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 2 through 4.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH —

JUMP SEAT (King Cab® models)

WARNING

∙ If a child restraint system is not in-

stalled properly, the child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint system on the driver’s side

jump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger’s side jump

seat without unfolding the seat

extender.

WARNING

∙ To install a rear-facing child restraint

on the passenger’s side jump seat, it

will be necessary to move the front

passenger’s seat fully forward and

place the front seatback upright or tilt

it forward. Failure to do so may cause

the child restraint to not be installed

properly and cause serious injury or

death in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS2357 LRS2356

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

– The front seat cannot be used

when a rear-facing child restraint

is installed on the jump seat. At-

tempting to do so could cause se-

rious injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a child re-

straint on the jump seat.

1. To access the jump seat extension

(passenger’s side only) 䊊

Aon the jump

seat, pull up 䊊

Bon the extension to un-

fold it to the open position. Then unfold

the two support legs 䊊

Cand lower the

jump seat to the full open seating posi-

tion.

LRS2725

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Move the front passenger’s seat into

the full forward position. Then move

the front seatback to the upright or

tilted forward position. Position the

child restraint on the jump seat. The

direction of the child restraint depends

on the type of the child restraint and

the size of the child. Always follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

3. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

4. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

Full open seating position

LRS2502

Rear-facing — step 2

LRS2552

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 4

WRS0801

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

5. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 4

WRS0802

Rear-facing – step 5

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS0674

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS (Crew Cab models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats: 1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0669

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0670

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Rear-facing – step 6

WRS0763

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE

SEAT BELTS — JUMP SEAT

(King Cab® models)

WARNING

∙ The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being prop-

erly secured. The restraint could tip

over or be loose and cause injury to a

child in a sudden stop or collision.

Also, it can change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this

section.

∙ A child restraint system will not be in-

stalled properly and the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Never install a rear-facing child re-

straint system on the driver’s side

jump seat.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger’s side jump

seat without unfolding the seat

extender.

WARNING

∙ To install a rear-facing child restraint

on the passenger’s side jump seat, it

will be necessary to move the front

passenger’s seat fully forward and

place the front seatback upright or tilt

it forward. Failure to do so may cause

the child restraint to not be installed

properly and cause serious injury or

death in a sudden stop or collision.

LRS0597 LRS0549

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– The front seat cannot be used

when a rear-facing child restraint

is installed on the jump seat. At-

tempting to do so could cause se-

rious injury in a sudden stop or

collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a child re-

straint on the passenger’s side jump seat.

1. To access the jump seat extension 䊊

on the passenger’s side jump seat, pull

up 䊊

Bon the extension to unfold it to

the open position. Then unfold the two

support legs 䊊

Cand lower the jump

seat to the full open seating position.

LRS2725

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

2. Move the front passenger’s seat into

the full forward position. Then move

the front seatback to the upright or

tilted forward position. Position the

child restraint on the jump seat. The

direction of the child restraint depends

on the type of the child restraint and

the size of the child. Always follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage 䊊

Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for belt

routing.

Full open seating position

LRS2502

Rear-facing — step 2

LRS2552

Rear-facing — step 3

LRS2726

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended 䊊

B. At this time, the seat

belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child

restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt 䊊

Cto remove any

slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

Rear-facing — step 4

LRS2727

Rear-facing — step 5

LRS2728

Rear-facing – step 6

WRS0762

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the seat

near the seat belt path. The child re-

straint should not move more than

1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to

tug it forward and check to see if the

seat belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

8. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 7.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH (Crew Cab models)

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs., (29.5 kg) use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint in the rear seats using

the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

Rear-facing — step 7

WRS0918

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed.

For additional information, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this sec-

tion.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 3 through 6.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Pull strap

2. Anchor points

Installing top tether strap (rear

bench seat for Crew Cab models)

To access the anchor points behind the

rear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback for-

ward by lifting up on the pull strap behind

the seatback.

1. Top tether strap

2. Tether strap

3. Tether anchor point

Before securing the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat-

ing positions for Crew Cab models) follow

these steps.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest to position the top

tether strap as shown. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Head restraints/

headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

4. Return the seatback to the locked po-

sition.

5. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Anchor point access

LRS0392

Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)

LRS0576

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING LATCH — JUMP SEAT

(King Cab® models)

WARNING

∙ If a child restraint system is not in-

stalled properly, the child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger’s side jump

seat without unfolding the seat

extender.

– For forward-facing child seats and

boosters, DO NOT install if the child

restraint base extends past the

forward edge of the driver’s side

seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

LRS2360 LRS2725

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Follow these steps to install a child re-

straint on the jump seat.

1. To access the jump seat extension

(passenger’s side only) 䊊

Aon the jump

seat, pull up 䊊

Bon the extension to un-

fold it to the open position. Then unfold

the two support legs 䊊

Cand lower the

jump seat to the full open seating posi-

tion.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

3. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section. Do not in-

stall child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating po-

Full open seating position

LRS2502

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 3

WRS0799

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

sitions that do not have a top tether

anchor.

4. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

5. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

6. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3

WRS0800

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0671

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. After attaching the child restraint, test it

before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

8. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 7.

1. Top tether strap

2. Routing bracket

3. Tether anchor point

Forward-facing – step 7

WRS0697

Jump seat (King Cab® models)

LRS0561

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

Installing top tether strap —

jump seat (King Cab® models)

WARNING

∙ Do not secure the top tether strap to

the routing bracket. If the child re-

straint is not anchored properly, the

risk of a child being injured or killed in

a collision or a sudden stop greatly

increases.

∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear seating posi-

tions).

1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top

tether strap routing bracket for the

jump seat.

2. Route the top tether strap through the

routing bracket.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the

tether anchor point as shown.

4. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether

strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS —

FRONT PASSENGER AND REAR

BENCH SEAT (Crew Cab models)

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats (Crew Cab models) or

in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the seat belt holds the restraint in

place. If the restraint is not secure,

tighten the seat belt as necessary, or

put the restraint in another seat and

test it again. You may need to try a

different child restraint. Not all child re-

straints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illu-

minated, refer to "Front passenger air

bag and status light" in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

1. Pull strap

2. Anchor points

Installing top tether strap (rear

bench seat for Crew Cab models)

To access the anchor points behind the

rear bench seat, tilt the rear seatback for-

ward by lifting up on the pull strap behind

the seatback.

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

Anchor point access

LRS0392

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Top tether strap

2. Tether strap

3. Tether anchor point

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest to position the top

tether strap as shown. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Head restraints/

headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

4. Return the seatback to the locked po-

sition.

5. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether

strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION

USING THE SEAT BELTS —

FRONT PASSENGER AND JUMP

SEATS (King Cab® models)

Rear bench seat (Crew Cab models)

LRS0576 LRS0598

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

WARNING

∙ The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result

in the child restraint not being prop-

erly secured. The restraint could tip

over or be loose and cause injury to a

child in a sudden stop or collision.

Also, it can change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this

section.

∙ If a child restraint system is not in-

stalled properly, the child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger’s side jump

seat without unfolding the seat

extender.

– For forward-facing child seats and

boosters, DO NOT install if the child

restraint system base extends

past the forward edge of the driv-

er’s side seat cushion.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the jump seats (King Cab® models)

or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) —

step 1

WRS0699

Forward-facing ( jump seat for

King Cab® models) — step 2

LRS2725

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. To access the jump seat extension

(passenger’s side only) 䊊

Aon the jump

seat, pull up 䊊

Bon the extension to

unfold it to the open position. Then un-

fold the two support legs 䊊

Cand lower

the jump seat to the full open seating

position.

3. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the child restraint is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Full open seating position

LRS2502

Forward-facing — step 3

WRS0919

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

4. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap to

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

5. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

Forward-facing — step 4

WRS0680

Forward-facing — step 5

LRS0667

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

7. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

8. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

9. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the seat

near the seat belt path. The child re-

straint should not move more than

1 inch (25 mm) from side to side. Try to

tug it forward and check to see if the

belt holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the belt

as necessary, or put the restraint in an-

other seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint.

Not all child restraints fit in all types of

vehicles.

Forward-facing — step 6

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 7

WRS0681

Forward-facing — step 9

WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

10. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 9.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light should

illuminate. If this light is not illuminated,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section. Move the

child restraint to another seating po-

sition. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

1. Top tether strap

2. Anchor point

Forward-facing — step 11

WRS0475

Front passenger seat (King Cab® models)

LRS0572

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing top tether strap —

front passenger seat

(King Cab® models)

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorages, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

1. If necessary, raise or remove the head

restraint/headrest to position the top

tether straps over the top of the seat-

back. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head restraint/

headrest when the child restraint is re-

moved. For additional information, refer

to “Head restraints/headrests” in this

section.

2. Position the top tether strap as shown.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

1. Top tether strap

2. Routing bracket

3. Tether anchor point

Jump seat (King Cab® models)

LRS0561

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

Installing top tether strap —

jump seat (King Cab® models)

WARNING

∙ Do not secure the top tether strap to

the routing bracket. If the child re-

straint is not anchored properly, the

risk of a child being injured or killed in

a collision or a sudden stop greatly

increases.

∙ Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

1. Pull the cover plate off to access the top

tether strap routing bracket for the

jump seat.

2. Route the top tether strap through the

routing bracket.

3. Secure the top tether strap to the

tether anchor point as shown.

4. Refer back to child restraint installation

steps before tightening the tether

strap.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

LRS2479 LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation — front

passenger seat (all models) and

rear seat (Crew Cab models)

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the rear seat or in the front passenger

seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

WRS0699

1-70 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light may or

may not illuminate, depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat being used. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Front passenger position

LRS0454 WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-71

Booster seat installation —

jump seat (King Cab® models)

WARNING

∙ If a child restraint system is not in-

stalled properly, the child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a sudden

stop or collision.

– For boosters, DO NOT install if the

child restraint system base ex-

tends past the forward edge of the

seat cushion.

– Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the passenger’s side jump

seat without unfolding the seat

extender.

∙ To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when

using a booster seat with the seat

belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the jump seats:

1. To access the jump seat extension

(passenger’s side only) 䊊

Aon the jump

seat, pull up 䊊

Bon the extension to un-

fold it to the open position. Then unfold

the two support legs 䊊

Cand lower the

jump seat to the full open seating posi-

tion.

LRS2725

1-72 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it

in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when

the booster seat is removed.

For additional information, refer to

“Head restraint/headrest” in this sec-

tion.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

LRS2502 LRS0539

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-73

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag

system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side-impact col-

lisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain

side-impact or rollover collisions. In a side-

impact, the curtain air bags are designed

to inflate on the side where the vehicle is

impacted. In a rollover, the curtain air bags

are designed to inflate and remain inflated

for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the seat belts

and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts

should always be correctly worn and the

occupant seated a suitable distance away

from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is in the ON or

START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

1-74 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents.

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit or if the front passenger seat

is unoccupied. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage, then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (pressure sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-75

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-76 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-77

WARNING

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 WRS0256

Do not lean against the door.

WRS0431

1-78 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat. The side air bag

and curtain air bag inflate with great

force. Do not allow anyone to place

their hand, leg or face near the side air

bag on the side of the seatback of the

front seat or near the side roof rails.

Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window

or lean against the door. Some ex-

amples of dangerous riding positions

are shown in the previous

illustrations.

Do not lean against doors or windows.

LRS0396

Do not lean against doors or windows.

SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-79

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

LRS0421 SSS0159

1-80 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag infla-

tors

2. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

3. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag module

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bags

5. Seat belt buckle switches

6. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

7. Supplemental front-impact air bag

modules

8. Crash zone sensor

9. Occupant classification system control

unit

10. Occupant classification sensor (pres-

sure sensor)

11. Satellite sensors

LRS2861

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-81

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S.regulations. It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors, occupant classifica-

tion sensor (pressure sensor) and passen-

ger seat belt tension sensor. Inflator opera-

tion is based on the severity of a collision

and seat belt usage for the driver. For the

front passenger, it additionally monitors

the weight of an occupant or object on the

seat and seat belt tension. Based on infor-

mation from the sensors, only one front air

bag may inflate in a crash, depending on

the crash severity and whether the front

occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-

tionally, the front passenger air bag may be

automatically turned off under some con-

ditions, depending on the weight detected

on the front passenger seat and how the

seat belt is used. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light will be illuminated (if the seat is

unoccupied, the light will not be illumi-

nated, but the air bag will be off). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in this section.

One front air bag inflating does not indicate

improper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag

module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

1-82 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON or START po-

sition.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status

light is located near the climate con-

trols. After the ignition switch is placed in

the "ON" position, the front passenger air

bag status light on the instrument panel

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off or remains illuminated depending

on the front passenger seat occupied sta-

tus. The light operates as follows:

∙ Unoccupied front passenger’s seat:

The light is OFF and the front pas-

senger air bag is OFF and will not inflate

in a crash.

∙ Front passenger’s seat occupied by a

small adult, child or child restraint as

outlined in this section: The light

illuminates to indicate that the front

passenger air bag is OFF and will not

inflate in a crash.

∙ Occupied front passenger seat and the

passenger meet the conditions out-

lined in this section: The light is

OFF to indicate that the front passen-

ger air bag is operational.

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-83

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classifi-

cation sensor (pressure sensor). It is in the

bottom of the front passenger seat cush-

ion and is designed to detect an occupant

and objects on the seat by weight. It works

together with seat belt sensors described

in this section. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF. Occupant classifi-

cation sensor operation can vary depend-

ing on the front passenger seat belt sen-

sors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are

designed to detect if the seat belt is buck-

led and the amount of tension on the seat

belt, such as when it is in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child re-

straint mode). Based on the weight on the

seat detected by the occupant classifica-

tion sensor and the belt tension detected

on the seat belt, the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System determines whether the front

passenger air bag should be automatically

turned OFF as required by the regulations.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however, if the occu-

pant does not sit in the seat properly (for

example, by not sitting upright,by sitting on

an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being

out of position), this could cause the sensor

to turn the air bag OFF. In addition, if the

occupant improperly uses the seat belt in

the ALR mode, this could cause the air bag

to be turned OFF. Always be sure to be

seated and wearing the seat belt properly

for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor and seat belt sensors are de-

signed to operate as described above to

turn the front passenger air bag OFF for

specified child restraints as required by the

regulations. Failing to properly secure child

restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a colli-

sion or sudden stop. This can also result in

the passenger air bag inflating in a crash

instead of being OFF. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

1-84 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF

with the seat occupied. The light will not

illuminate when the front passenger seat is

unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is not illuminated, reposition

the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, the

system may be sensing an unoccupied

seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). A

NISSAN dealer can check that the system is

OFF by using a special tool. However, until

you have confirmed with a dealer that your

air bag is working properly, reposition the

occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the passenger seat status. For example, if a

large adult who is sitting in the front pas-

senger seat exits the vehicle, the front pas-

senger air bag status light will go from OFF

to ON for a few seconds and then to OFF.

This is normal system operation and does

not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will blink. Have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Other supplemental front-impact

air bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-85

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (pressure

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equip-

ment. The Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) wiring harnesses*

should not be modified or discon-

nected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1-86 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental

air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual apply and must

be followed. The side air bags and curtain

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity side collisions, although they may

inflate if the forces in another type of colli-

sion are similar to those of a higher severity

impact. They are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. They

may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by release of smoke.This smoke is

not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it

may cause irritation and choking. Those

with a history of a breathing condition

should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvic area of the front occu-

pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the

impact force to the head of occupants in

the front and rear outboard seating posi-

tions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side

air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-

sions or other injuries. Side air bags and

curtain air bags do not provide restraint to

the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and passenger seated up-

right as far as practical away from the side

air bag. Rear seat passengers should be

seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bag

and curtain air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bags will remain inflated for

a short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

in the ON or START position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

LRS2501

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-87

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

curtain air bag systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It

is also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

or curtain air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness or connectors

are yellow or orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

1-88 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the

seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-

chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner system. For additional

information, refer to "Supplemental air bag

warning light" in this section. If the opera-

tion of the supplemental air bag warning

light indicates there is a malfunction, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the

surface of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WRS0885

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-89

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and pretensioner systems need servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner

systems may not operate properly. They

must be checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible.It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LRS0100

1-90 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred.These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked to verify it is still functioning

correctly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The OCS should be checked even if no

air bags deploy as a result of the im-

pact. Failure to verify proper OCS

function may result in an improper air

bag deployment resulting in injury or

death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-91

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel................................2-2

Meters and gauges..............................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................................2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-6

Fuel gauge ...................................2-7

Engine oil pressure gauge (if so

equipped) ....................................2-8

Voltmeter (if so equipped) ....................2-8

Trip computer (if so equipped) ................2-9

Compass and outside temperature display

(if so equipped) .................................2-10

Outside temperature display .................2-11

Compass.....................................2-11

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................2-14

Checking lights..............................2-15

Warning lights ...............................2-15

Indicator lights ..............................2-20

Audible reminders ...........................2-24

Security systems (if so equipped) ...............2-25

Vehicle security system (if so equipped) .....2-25

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped) ..............................2-26

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-28

Switch operation ............................2-28

Rear window or outside mirror defroster

switch (if so equipped)..........................2-28

Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-29

Headlight control switch.....................2-29

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system

(if so equipped) ..............................2-32

Instrument brightness control...............2-32

Turn signal switch ...........................2-32

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-33

Horn ...........................................2-33

Cargo lamp switch .............................2-34

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-34

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-35

Hill descent control switch (if so equipped)......2-36

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch (if so equipped)..................2-37

Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

(if so equipped) .................................2-38

Rear Sonar System (RSS) OFF switch

(if so equipped) .................................2-39

Power outlets ..................................2-39

Storage ........................................2-40

Front-door pockets..........................2-40

Rear-door pockets ..........................2-41

Seatback pocket (if so equipped) ............2-41

Under-seat storage bins.....................2-42

Storagetrays................................2-43

Glovebox....................................2-45

Console box .................................2-45

Overhead sunglasses storage ...............2-45

Cup holders .................................2-46

Roof rack (if so equipped)....................2-48

Windows .......................................2-49

Manual windows (if so equipped) ............2-49

Power windows (if so equipped) .............2-50

Rear sliding window (if so equipped) .........2-52

Moonroof (if so equipped) ......................2-52

Power moonroof ............................2-52

Interior lights ...................................2-54

Map lights (if so equipped) ...................2-55

HomeLink® universal transceiver

(if so equipped) .................................2-55

Programming HomeLink® ...................2-56

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers................2-57

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ..................................2-58

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............2-58

Clearing the programmed information ......2-59

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button.......................................2-59

If your vehicle is stolen.......................2-59

1. Vents (P. 4-17)

2. Headlight/fog light

(if so equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-29)

3. Steering wheel switch for audio

control (P. 4-72)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System (P. 4-80, 4-92)

4. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-74)

Horn (P. 2-33)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-14)

6. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-22)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-28)

8. Storage (P. 2-40)

9. Audio system (P. 4-31)

10. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-74)

11. Upper and lower glove box (P. 2-40)

12. Passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-74)

13. USB connection port (P. 4-59)

AUX input (P. 4-59)

14. Power outlets (P. 2-39)

LII2484

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Electronic locking rear differential

(E-Lock) system switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-37)

Heated seat switches

(if so equipped) (P. 2-34)

Rear sonar switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-39)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

OFF switch (P. 2-35)

16. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

17. 4WD shift switch (if so equipped)

(P. 5-26)

18. Climate controls (P. 4-17, P. 4-26)

19. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

20. Ignition switch (P. 5-10)

21. Tilt steering wheel control

(if so equipped) (P. 3-14)

22. Cargo lamp switch (P. 2-34)

Clutch interlock (clutch start)

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-38)

Hill descent control switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-36)

Outside mirror controls

(if so equipped) (P. 3-15)

1. Warning and indicator lights

2. Tachometer

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Change/reset button

6. Voltmeter (if so equipped)

7. Odometer

Twin trip odometer

Trip computer (if so equipped)

Instrument brightness control knob

8. Engine oil pressure gauge

9. Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC3327

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side of the meter clus-

ter. The odometer is located within the trip

computer.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is dis-

played when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle is driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

Changing the display

For vehicles equipped with twin trip odom-

eter, pressing the change/reset button

changes the display as follows:

Trip →Trip →Trip

LIC3629

With twin trip odometer

LIC0780

2-4 Instruments and controls

For vehicles equipped with trip computer,

pressing the change/reset button

changes the display as follows:

Trip →Trip →Distance to Empty

→Average speed →Average fuel con-

sumption →Journey time →Trip

For additional information, refer to “Trip

computer” in this section.

Resetting the trip odometer

Pressing the change/reset button for

more than 1 second resets the currently

displayed trip odometer to zero.

Loose fuel cap warning message

Press the change/reset button 䊊

Afor more

than 1 second to reset the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message after the fuel cap has

been tightened. For additional information,

refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Check tire pressure warning

message

The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is displayed when the low tire

pressure warning light is illuminated and

low tire pressure is detected. Check and

adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label. The

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-

sage turns off when the low tire pressure

warning light turns off.

With trip computer

WIC0922 LIC3741 LIC3742

Instruments and controls 2-5

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning mes-

sage is displayed each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as long

as the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in this section, “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section, and “Wheels

and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm).

Do not rev the engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce

engine speed. Operating the engine in

the red zone may cause serious engine

damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture is within the normal range 䊊

1when

the gauge needle points within the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies

with the outside air temperature and driv-

ing conditions.

LIC0738 LIC0739

2-6 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range,reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon

as safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

For additional information, refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual

for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-

ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The low fuel warning light comes on when

the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler

door is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips. the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the ve-

hicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

LIC0740

Instruments and controls 2-7

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE

(if so equipped)

The gauge indicates the engine lubrication

system oil pressure while the engine is run-

ning. The needle should be in the middle of

the gauge when the engine is running.

CAUTION

∙ This gauge is not designed to indicate

low engine oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Engine oil” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

∙ If the gauge needle does not move

with the proper amount of engine oil,

have the vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. Continued vehicle op-

eration in such a condition could

cause serious damage to the engine.

VOLTMETER (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the voltmeter indicates the bat-

tery voltage. When the engine is running, it

indicates the generator voltage.

While cranking the engine, the volts drop

below the normal range. If the needle is not

in the normal range (11 - 15 volts) 䊊

1while

the engine is running, it may indicate that

the charging system is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LIC0741 WIC1299

2-8 Instruments and controls

TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)

The display of the trip computer is situated

in the speedometer display. When the igni-

tion switch is placed in the ON position, the

display scrolls all the modes of the trip

computer and then shows the mode cho-

sen before the ignition switch was placed

in the OFF position.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, modes of the trip computer can

be selected by pressing the change/reset

button. The following modes can be selected:

Distance To Empty

(DTE—mile or km)

The DTE mode provides you with an esti-

mation of the distance that can be driven

before refueling. The DTE is constantly be-

ing calculated, based on the amount of fuel

in the fuel tank and the actual fuel con-

sumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The DTE mode includes a low range warn-

ing feature: when the fuel level is low, the

DTE mode is automatically selected and

the digits blink in order to draw the driver’s

attention. Press the change/reset button if

you wish to return to the mode that was

selected before the warning occurred. The

DTE mark will remain blinking until the ve-

hicle is refueled.

When the fuel level drops even lower, the

DTE display will change to (----).

NOTE:

∙If the amount of fuel added while the

ignition switch is off is small, the dis-

play just before the ignition switch is

turned off may continue to be dis-

played.

∙

When driving uphill or rounding curves,

the fuel in the tank shifts, which may

momentarily change the display.

Average fuel consumption

(Mpg or l/100km)

The average fuel consumption mode

shows the average fuel consumption since

the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing

the change/reset button for more than ap-

proximately 1 second. The display is up-

dated every 30 seconds. At about the first

1/3 miles (500 m) after a reset, the display

shows (----).

Average speed (mph or km/h)

The average speed mode shows the aver-

age vehicle speed since last reset. Reset-

ting is done by pressing the change/reset

button for more than approximately 1 sec-

ond. The display is updated every 30 sec-

onds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the

display shows (----).

LIC3743

Instruments and controls 2-9

Journey time

The journey time mode shows the time

since the last reset. The displayed time can

be reset by pressing the change/reset but-

ton for more than approximately 1 second.

Trip computer reset

Pressing the change/reset button for

more than 3 seconds will reset all modes

except Trip A and distance to empty.

This unit has the following functions:

∙ Measures terrestrial magnetism and in-

dicates heading direction of vehicle

∙ Indicates outside air temperature

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the or button as de-

scribed in the charts below to activate vari-

ous features of the automatic anti-glare

rearview mirror.

Type A (if so equipped)

Press and hold

the

button for

about:

Feature:

(Press button again for about

1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass toggles on/off

8 seconds Automatic anti-glare/indicator

light toggles on/off

11 seconds

Compass zone can be changed

to correct false compass read-

ings

13 seconds Compass enters calibration

mode

Type B (if so equipped)

Press and hold

the

button for

about:

Feature:

(Press button again for about

1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass toggles on/off

8 seconds

Compass zone can be changed

to correct false compass read-

ings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration

mode

For additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic anti-glare rearview mirror” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

COMPASS AND OUTSIDE

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

(if so equipped)

2-10 Instruments and controls

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Push the or button for about

1 second when the ignition key is in the ON

position to toggle the outside temperature

and compass direction display 䊊

1on or off.

∙ To change from °F to °C, push and hold

the button for about 5 seconds or

the button for about 3 seconds

until the display begins to flash. Press

the button again to toggle between °C

and °F.

∙ When the outside temperature is be-

tween 140°F (60°C) and 194°F (90°C), the

display will read 140°F (60°C). When the

temperature is above 194°F (90°C), the

display will read “SC”.

∙ When the outside temperature is be-

tween than -40°F (-40°C) and -60°F

(-51°C), the display will read -40°F (-40°C).

When the temperature is below -60°F

(-51°C), the display will read “OC”.

∙ The outside temperature sensor is lo-

cated in front of the radiator. The sensor

may be affected by road or engine heat,

wind direction and other driving condi-

tions. The display may differ from the

actual outside temperature or the tem-

perature displayed on various signs or

billboards.

COMPASS

Push the or button for about

1 second when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position to toggle the outside

temperature and compass direction dis-

play 䊊

1on or off. The display will indicate

the direction that the vehicle is heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-

pass by driving the vehicle in three com-

plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driv-

ing your vehicle on your everyday route.

The compass will be calibrated once it has

tracked three complete circles.

Type A (if so equipped)

WIC0904

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC0583

Instruments and controls 2-11

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north

and geographical north is known as vari-

ance. In some areas, this difference can

sometimes be great enough to cause false

compass readings. Follow these instruc-

tions to set the variance for your particular

location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for

about 8 seconds. The current zone

number will appear in the display. Re-

lease the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone

map. Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to

toggle through the zone numbers until

the desired number appears in the dis-

play. Once you have selected a zone

number, the display will show a com-

pass direction within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0355

2-12 Instruments and controls

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with au-

tomatic correction function. If the correct

direction is not shown, follow this proce-

dure.

1. With the display turned on, press and

hold the for about 10 seconds.

The “C” icon in the compass display will

illuminate.

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the

vehicle in three complete circles at a

maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles, the display

should return to normal.

CAUTION

∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the

operation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it

may cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-13

4WD warning light ( model) Low windshield-washer fluid warning light

(if so equipped)

High beam indicator light (blue)

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Hill descent control system ON indicator

light (if so equipped)

Automatic transmission oil temperature

warning light (if so equipped)

Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Automatic transmission park

warning light ( model)

4WD shift indicator light ( model)

Overdrive OFF indicator light

(if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Automatic transmission position

indicator light (if so equipped)

Security indicator light (if so equipped)

Charge warning light Cruise main switch indicator light Slip indicator light

Door open warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Transfer 4LO position indicator light

(model)

Engine oil pressure warning light Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system ON indicator light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low fuel warning light Front passenger air bag status light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-14 Instruments and controls

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, or , , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) come

on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,

, ,

If any light fails to come on or operate in a

way other than described, it may indicate a

burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING LIGHTS

This vehicle has various warning lights that

may illuminate to indicate a potential prob-

lem. For additional information, refer to the

specific light in this section.

4WD warning light

(model)

The 4WD warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is turned to the ON position.

It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If the engine or vehicle is not functioning

properly, the warning light will either re-

main illuminated or blink. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Using 4–wheel drive

(4WD)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

CAUTION

∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks

during operation, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD

warning light turns on when you are

driving on dry hard surface roads:

– in the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for automatic

transmission models, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position with the brake

pedal depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– in the 4LO position for manual

transmission models, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position with the clutch

pedal depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD,

∙ If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

Instruments and controls 2-15

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Automatic transmission oil

temperature warning light

(if so equipped)

This light comes on when the automatic

transmission oil temperature is too high. If

the light comes on while driving, reduce the

vehicle speed as soon as safely possible

until the light turns off.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation when the

A/T oil temperature warning light is on

may damage the automatic transmission.

Automatic transmission

park warning light

(model)

WARNING

∙ If the ATP light is ON, this indicates

that the automatic transmission P

(Park) position will not function and

the transfer case is in neutral.

∙ When parking, always make sure that

the 4WD shift indicator light illumi-

nates and the parking brake is set.

Failure to engage the transfer posi-

tion in 2WD, 4H or 4LO could result in

the vehicle moving unexpectedly, re-

sulting in serious personal injury or

property damage.

∙ Shift the 4WD switch into the 2WD, 4H

or 4LO position again to turn off the

ATP warning light when the shift lever

is in the P position and the ATP warn-

ing light is ON. (Before shifting the

4WD switch into the 4LO position,

move the shift lever into the N posi-

tion once, shift the shift lever into P

again and make sure the ATP warning

light is OFF.)

This light indicates that the automatic

transmission parking function is not en-

gaged. If the transfer control is not secured

in any drive position while the shift lever is

in the P (Park) position,the transmission will

disengage and the drive wheels will not

lock.

or Brake

warning light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the park-

ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2-16 Instruments and controls

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be

dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the ABS warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed

driving and abrupt braking. For additional

information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage

control system and the vehicle bat-

tery may not charge completely. For

additional information, refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-

tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors

are not closed securely while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

Engine oil pressure

warning light

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If

the light flickers or comes on during nor-

mal driving, pull off the road in a safe area,

stop the engine immediately and call a

NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair

shop.

Instruments and controls 2-17

The engine oil pressure warning light is

not designed to indicate a low oil level.

Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For

additional information, refer to “Engine oil”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil

pressure warning light on could cause

serious damage to the engine almost

immediately. Such damage is not cov-

ered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as

it is safe to do so.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in

the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon

as it is convenient, preferably before the

fuel gauge reaches E (Empty). There will be

a small reserve of fuel in the tank when

the fuel gauge needle reaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure

warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the

spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate. A CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure)

warning message is also displayed in the

odometer.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted.

After the tire is inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h)

to activate the TPMS and turn off the low

tire pressure warning light. Use a tire

pressure gauge to check the tire pres-

sure.

The low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is dis-

played each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

For additional information, refer to “Check

tire pressure warning message” in this sec-

tion and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section

and in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2-18 Instruments and controls

The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning does not

appear if the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the light does not illuminate with

the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, have the vehicle checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

show on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-19

Low windshield-washer

fluid warning light

(if so equipped)

This light comes on when the windshield-

washer fluid is at a low level. Add

windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For

additional information, refer to “Windshield-

washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

Seat belt warning light

and chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position and remains illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime sounds for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-

tem does not activate the warning light for

the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner seat belt systems need

servicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioner(s) may not func-

tion properly. For additional information, re-

fer to “Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible.It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

This vehicle has various indicator lights

that may illuminate to indicate a system

status. For additional information, refer to

the specific light in this section.

2-20 Instruments and controls

4WD shift indicator light

(model)

The light should turn off within 1 second

after placing the ignition switch in the ON

position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift

indicator light will illuminate the position

selected by the 4WD shift switch.

The 4WD shift indicator light may blink

while shifting from one drive mode to

the other.

Automatic transmission

position indicator light

(if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Cruise main switch

indicator light

The light comes on when the cruise control

main switch is pushed. The light goes out

when the main switch is pushed again.

When the cruise main switch indicator light

comes on, the cruise control system is op-

erational. For additional information, refer

to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

Cruise set switch

indicator light

The light comes on while the vehicle speed

is controlled by the cruise control system. If

the light blinks while the engine is running,

it may indicate the cruise control system is

not functioning properly. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Electronic locking rear

differential (E-Lock) system

ON indicator light

(if so equipped)

This light comes on when the electronic

locking rear differential (E-Lock) system

clutch is fully engaged.

The indicator light flashes when the sys-

tem is first turned on.When the system fully

engages, the light remains on. If the switch

is on and the indicator light continues to

flash, the system is not engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem switch” in this section and “Electronic

locking rear differential (E-Lock) system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status

light will be lit and the passenger front

air bag will be off depending on how the

front passenger seat is being used.

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system

ON indicator light

(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on briefly and

then turns off.

Instruments and controls 2-21

The light comes on when the hill descent

control system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and

the indicator light blinks, the system is not

engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the hill descent switch is on, the sys-

tem may not be functioning properly. Have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control switch” in this section and “Hill

descent control system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or

blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The MIL may also come on steady if the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 gal (11.4 L) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for inspection/maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission control

system malfunction has been de-

tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in

the trip computer. If the fuel-filler cap is

loose or missing, tighten or install the

cap and continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips, have

the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Overdrive OFF indicator

light (if so equipped)

This light comes on when the overdrive

function is OFF.

The automatic transmission overdrive

function is controlled by the overdrive

switch.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Security indicator light (if

so equipped)

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This func-

tion indicates the security systems

equipped on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security

systems” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC sys-

tem is operating, thus alerting the driver to

the fact that the road surface is slippery

and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working;

this is normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after

the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after ap-

proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-

erational. If the light does not come on

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Transfer 4LO position

indicator light

(model)

This light comes on when the 4WD shift

switch is set in the 4LO position with the

ignition switch in the ON position.

The transfer case may be damaged if you

shift the switch while driving.

Make sure the transfer 4LO position indica-

tor light turns on when you shift the 4WD

shift switch to 4LO.

The indicator light may blink while shift-

ing from one drive mode to the other.

The 4LO indicator light must stop blinking

and remain illuminated or turn off before

shifting the transmission into gear. If the

shift lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)

position to any other gear when the 4LO

indicator light is blinking, the vehicle may

move unexpectedly.

When you shift between 4H and 4LO, follow

the instructions below:

∙ For automatic transmission models,

stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position with the

brake pedal depressed, then depress

and turn the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or

4H.

∙ For manual transmission models, stop

the vehicle and shift the shift lever to

the N (Neutral) position with the clutch

pedal depressed,then depress and turn

the 4WD shift switch to 4LO or 4H.

You cannot move the transfer 4WD shift

switch between 4H and 4LO unless you

stop the vehicle and shift the shift lever to

the N position with the brake pedal (A/T

models) or clutch pedal (M/T models) de-

pressed.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF posi-

tion, the transfer case is in the 4LO position

(model), or when the VDC system

is not functioning properly. This indicates

the VDC system is not operating.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The VDC light also comes on when you turn

the ignition key to the ON position.The light

will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on

or comes on along with the SLIP ( )

indicator light while you are driving, have

the VDC system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

If the battery is removed or discharged, the

VDC system is disabled and the VDC indi-

cator light will not turn off after 2 seconds

when the ignition switch is turned to the

ON position. To reset the system, you must

perform the reset procedure. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

If the light does not go off after performing

the reset procedure, have the traction con-

trol system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

The VDC system will be disabled and the

VDC light will illuminate when the elec-

tronic locking rear differential (E-lock) sys-

tem switch (if so equipped) is turned on

and the E-lock system is engaged. If the

E-lock system disengages or the switch is

turned off, the VDC system will be enabled

and the VDC light will turn off.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is

opened while the key is left in the ignition

switch. Remove the key and take it with you

when leaving the vehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before

leaving the vehicle.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Your vehicle may have two types of security

systems:

∙ Vehicle security system (if so equipped)

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped)

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audible alarm signals if someone

opens the doors when the system is

armed. It is not, however, a motion

detection-type system that activates

when a vehicle is moved or when a vibra-

tion occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the ignition, and

always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer

such equipment. Check with your insur-

ance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection

features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The

doors can be locked with the key,

power door lock switch (if the door is

opened, locked and then closed), or

with the key fob.

Key fob operation:

∙ Press the button on the key

fob. All doors lock. The hazard lights

flash twice and the horn beeps once

to indicate all doors are locked.

∙ When the button is pressed

with all doors locked, the hazard

lights flash twice and the horn beeps

once as a reminder that the doors

are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. For

additional information, refer to “Silenc-

ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre-

driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

4. Confirm that the indicator light

comes on. The light stays on for

about 30 seconds. The vehicle security

system is now pre-armed. After about

30 seconds the vehicle security system

automatically shifts into the armed

phase. The light begins to flash

once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30-

second pre-arm time period, the driv-

er’s door is unlocked by the key or the

LIC3766

SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-25

key fob, or the ignition switch is placed

in ACC or ON position, the system will

not arm.

∙If the key is turned slowly when lock-

ing the driver’s door, the system may

not arm. Furthermore, if the key is

turned beyond the vertical position

toward the unlock position the sys-

tem may be disarmed when the key is

removed. If the indicator light fails to

glow for a period of time, unlock the

door once and lock it again.

∙Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

arm with all doors closed and locked

with the ignition switch placed in the

OFF position.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off after

a period of time. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again. The alarm can be shut off by

unlocking the driver’s door with the key

or by pressing the button on the

key fob.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ Opening a door without using the key or

key fob (even if the door is unlocked by

using the inside lock knob or the power

door lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv-

er’s door with the key or by pressing

the button on the key fob.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

2-26 Instruments and controls

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions; (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

placed in the LOCK position with the key

removed from the ignition switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, the light will remain on

while the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System as

soon as possible. Please bring all regis-

tered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

LIC0474

Instruments and controls 2-27

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted by turning the

knob toward 䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster)

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the res-

ervoir tank is empty.

To defrost the rear window glass (if so

equipped), place the ignition switch in the

ON or START position and push the rear

window defroster switch on. The rear win-

dow defroster indicator light on the switch

comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

To defrost the outside mirrors (if so

equipped), place the ignition switch in the

ON or START position and push the outside

mirror defroster switch on. The outside

mirror defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to

turn the defroster off.

LIC3775

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC1419

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REAR WINDOW OR OUTSIDE MIRROR

DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-28 Instruments and controls

The rear window/outside mirror defroster

(if so equipped) automatically turns off af-

ter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3279

Type A (if so equipped)

WIC1424

Type B (if so equipped)

WIC1452

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-29

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights

to be set so they turn on and off automati-

cally. The autolight system can:

∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,

tail, license plate and instrument panel

lights automatically when it is dark.

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.

∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you turn the key to the OFF posi-

tion and all doors are closed.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position 䊊

2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off

and a door is opened and left open, the

headlights remain on for a period of time. If

another door is opened while the head-

lights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, ,or position.

Type C (if so equipped)

WIC1426 LIC0561

2-30 Instruments and controls

Be sure you do not put anything on top

of the autolight sensor 䊊

1located in the

top side of the instrument panel. The au-

tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it

is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as

if it is dark out and the headlights will

illuminate. If this occurs while parked

with the engine off and the switch in the

ON position, your vehicle’s battery could

become discharged.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are engaged and

push the lever forward. The high beam

lights come on and the light illu-

minates. For additional information, re-

fer to “Headlight control switch” in this

section.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low

beams.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

The low beams need not be engaged

for this function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in

the or position, the headlights

will turn off after a period of time.

After the headlights automatically turn off

with the headlight switch in the

or position, the headlights will illumi-

nate again if the headlight switch is moved

to the OFF position and then turned to

the or position.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

LIC0835 LIC0562

Instruments and controls 2-31

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT (DRL)

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The DRL automatically illuminate when the

engine is started with the parking brake

released. The DRL operate with the head-

light switch in the OFF position or in the

position. Turn the headlight switch

to the position for full illumination

when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.

The DRL illuminate when the parking brake

is released. The DRL will remain on until the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

The instrument brightness control oper-

ates when the headlight control switch is in

the AUTO (if so equipped), or

position.

Turn the control 䊊

Ato adjust the brightness

of the instrument panel lights when driving

at night.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Hold the lever until the lane change is

complete.

WIC0917 LIC0563

2-32 Instruments and controls

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

(if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight

switch to the position, then turn the

fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position (if so equipped),

the headlights must be on, then turn the

fog light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

To sound the horn, push the area between

the horn icons on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

LIC0393 WIC1449

HORN

Instruments and controls 2-33

To turn on the cargo lamp, push the switch

down to the ON position.

CAUTION

Be sure to turn the light switch to the

OFF position when you leave the vehicle

for extended periods of time, otherwise

the battery will go dead.

The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON or

START position.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired, depending on the tempera-

ture. The indicator light in the switch

will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the

switch off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

LIC0616 LIC3762

CARGO LAMP SWITCH HEATED SEAT SWITCHES

(if so equipped)

2-34 Instruments and controls

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The indicator will come

on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3344

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-35

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle

speed when driving on steep downhill

grades. Always drive carefully when

using the hill descent control system

and decelerate the vehicle speed by

depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driv-

ing on frozen, muddy or extremely

steep downhill roads. Failure to con-

trol vehicle speed may result in a loss

of control of the vehicle and possible

serious injury or death.

∙ The hill descent control may not con-

trol the vehicle speed on a hill under

all load or road conditions. Always be

prepared to depress the brake pedal

to control vehicle speed. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system

operates continuously for a long time,

the temperature of the brake pads may

increase and the hill descent control

system may be temporarily disabled

(the indicator light will blink). If the indi-

cator light does not come on continu-

ously after blinking, stop using the

system.

The hill descent control system is designed

to reduce driver workload when going

down steep hills. The hill descent control

system helps to control vehicle speed so

the driver can concentrate on steering the

vehicle.

To activate the hill descent control system:

∙ The shift lever must be in forward or

reverse gear,

∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4L posi-

tion and the vehicle speed must be un-

der 15 mph (25 km/h) or

∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4H posi-

tion and the vehicle speed must be un-

der 21 mph (35 km/h), and

∙ The hill descent control system switch

must be ON.

The hill descent control system ON indica-

tor light will come on when the system is

activated. Also, the stop/tail lights illumi-

nate while the hill descent control system

applies the brakes to control vehicle speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-

pressed while the hill descent control sys-

tem is on, the system will stop operating

temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or

brake pedal is released, the hill descent

control system begins to function again if

the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

The hill descent control system ON indica-

tor light blinks if the switch is on and all

conditions for system activation are not

met or if the system becomes disengaged

for any reason.

To turn off the hill descent control system,

push the switch to the OFF position.

LIC0743

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SWITCH

(if so equipped)

2-36 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control system ON indicator light” in

this section and “Hill descent control sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

The E-Lock system can help provide added

traction if the vehicle is stuck or becoming

stuck.

To activate the E-Lock system:

∙ The 4WD switch must be in the 4LO po-

sition (4-wheel drive vehicles),

∙ The vehicle must be stopped or moving

at 4 mph (7 km/h) or less, and

∙ The E-Lock system switch must be

turned on.

When the E-Lock switch is turned on, the

indicator light will flash until the system

engages. However, if all operation condi-

tions listed above are not met or the sys-

tem becomes disengaged, the indicator

light will continue to flash.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is dis-

abled and the ABS light illuminates when

the E-Lock system is on. Also, the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled

and the VDC light illuminates when the

E-Lock system is on.

For additional information, refer to “Elec-

tronic locking rear differential (E-Lock) sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual for further explanation and

system limitations.

WARNING

∙ Never leave the E-Lock system on

when driving on paved or hard-

surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle

may result in the rear wheels slipping

and result in an accident and personal

injury. After using the E-lock system

to free the vehicle, turn the system off.

LIC0729

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM

SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-37

∙ Use the E-Lock system only when

freeing a stuck vehicle.Try the 4LO po-

sition before using the E-Lock system.

Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-

pery road surface such as snow or ice

surface. Using the E-Lock system

when driving in these road conditions

may cause unexpected movement of

the vehicle during engine braking, ac-

celerating or turning, which may re-

sult in an accident and serious per-

sonal injury.

CAUTION

∙ After using the E-lock system, turn

the switch off to prevent possible

damage to driveline components

from extended use.

∙ Do not drive over 12 mph (20 km/h)

when the system is engaged. Doing so

could result in possible damage to the

driveline.

∙ Do not turn on the E-lock system

while the tires are spinning. Doing so

could damage drivetrain components.

WARNING

Pay special attention to your surround-

ings when using the clutch interlock

switch. The vehicle will move forward or

backward according to the gear

selected.

The clutch interlock (clutch start) switch

allows for starting the engine without de-

pressing the clutch pedal. This feature

helps you restart the engine if it stops un-

der difficult conditions. (For example, the

engine stops on a steep hill and a slight

movement forward or backward might be

dangerous.)

To use the clutch interlock switch:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Depress the brake pedal with your right

foot.

3. Place your left foot on the brake pedal

and release the parking brake.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion.

5. Push and release the clutch interlock

switch. The CANCEL light on the switch

will illuminate.

6. Turn the ignition to the START position

to start the engine and, at the same

time, depress the accelerator pedal

with your right foot. As the vehicle be-

gins to move, take your left foot off the

brake. Once the engine has started, the

clutch interlock switch CANCEL light

shuts off. Do not use the interlock

switch to start the engine under nor-

mal driving conditions.

WIC0817

CLUTCH INTERLOCK (clutch start)

SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-38 Instruments and controls

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a convenience

but it is not a substitute for proper

backing. Always turn and check that it is

safe to do so before backing up. Always

back up slowly.

The rear sonar system (if so equipped) is

active when the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position and the shift lever is in R

(Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft

(1.8 m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is

emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by

pushing the OFF switch. When the system

is disabled, the indicator light on the switch

will illuminate.

The system will automatically reset the

next time the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Rear

Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and

driving” section in this manual.

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)

maximum.

The power outlets are powered only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON po-

sition.

Open the cap to use a power outlet.

LIC0471

Front row

WIC1420

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) OFF

SWITCH (if so equipped) POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-39

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for additional information.

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights or rear win-

dow defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned off.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquids to contact the outlet.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

Center console

LIC0761 WIC0824

STORAGE

2-40 Instruments and controls

REAR-DOOR POCKETS SEATBACK POCKET

(if so equipped)

A seatback pocket may be located on the

back of the driver’s seat. The pocket may

be used to store maps.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC0826

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC0825 LIC1328

Instruments and controls 2-41

UNDER-SEAT STORAGE BINS

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

∙ The cargo restrained in the under-

seat storage bins must not exceed the

weight limits listed below or the bins

may not stay secured. In a sudden

stop or collision, the unsecured bins

could cause personal injury.

King Cab® model: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)

Crew Cab model

Driver’s side: 16 lbs. (7.25 kg)

Passenger’s side: 25 lbs. (11.33 kg)

∙ If the under-seat storage bins are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or dam-

age to the vehicle in case of sudden

braking or an accident.

Rear row under-seat storage bin

(King Cab® model)

LIC0821

Rear row under-seat storage bin

(Crew Cab model)

LIC0820

2-42 Instruments and controls

∙ Do not place sharp objects in the

under-seat storage bins. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury when the vehicle is

moving or if the vehicle is involved in a

collision.

To access the under-seat storage bins:

For King Cab® models, lift up the jump seat.

For additional information, refer to “Jump

seat” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

For Crew Cab models, lift up the rear bench

seat. For additional information, refer to

“Folding the rear bench seat down” in the

“Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

To remove the under-seat storage bins:

1. Remove the storage net.

2. Turn the knobs to the UNLOCK position

䊊

3. Remove the tray by lifting it out of the

storage bin (King Cab® model).

To install the under-seat storage bins:

1. Position the under-seat storage bin so

the holes line up with the holes in the

floorboard.

2. Insert the knobs and turn them to the

LOCK position 䊊

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays

to help prevent injury in an accident or

sudden stop.

LIC0822

Top center tray

LIC1539

Instruments and controls 2-43

A/T model

LIC0818

M/T model — Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3646

M/T model — Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3647

2-44 Instruments and controls

GLOVE BOX

To open the top portion of the glove box,

push the latch 䊊

Aup and raise the lid.

To open the lower portion of the glove box,

pull the handle 䊊

Bdown and lower the lid.

WARNING

Keep the glove box lid closed while driv-

ing to help prevent injury in an accident

or a sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

Pull up on the lever 䊊

1to open the console

box lid 䊊

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the

holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

LIC0768 LIC0766 LIC3387

Instruments and controls 2-45

CAUTION

∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

The front cup holders have adapters that

can be removed to accommodate larger

cups.

WARNING

∙ The cup holder should not be used

while driving so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

∙ Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid

is hot, it can scald you or your

passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Front

WIC0827

2-46 Instruments and controls

To open the rear row cup holders (rear of

the front console), lower the lid. To close,

raise the lid. If stepped on, the cup holder is

designed to snap loose from the console.

To re-install, close the cup holder assembly

and push it back into the console opening.

To fold the rear seat back,first close the cup

holder.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use the bottle holder for any

other objects that could be thrown

about in the vehicle and possibly in-

jure people during sudden braking or

an accident.

∙ Do not use the bottle holder for open

liquid containers.

Rear seat (rear of front console)

WIC0771

Front bottle holders

LIC0784

Rear bottle holders

WIC0828

Instruments and controls 2-47

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Drive extra carefully when the vehicle

is loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

roof rack.

∙ Heavy loading of the roof rack has the

potential to affect the vehicle stability

and handling during sudden or ab-

normal handling maneuvers.

∙ Roof rack load should be evenly

distributed.

∙ Do not exceed maximum roof rack

load weight capacity.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

WIC0857

2-48 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Use care when placing or removing

items from the roof rack. If you cannot

comfortably lift the items onto the roof

rack from the ground, use a ladder or

stool.

Always evenly distribute the cargo on the

tubular roof rack. The maximum total

load is 125 lbs. (56 kg) evenly distributed.

Be careful that your vehicle does not ex-

ceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Ratings

(GAWR front and rear).The GVWR and GAWR

are located on the F.M.V.S.S. label (located

on the driver’s side door jamb pillar). For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

The front crossbar can be adjusted or re-

moved. Use the TORX® driver provided in

the tool kit to loosen both crossbar adjust-

ing screws.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

TORX® driver 䊊

1by turning counter-

clockwise 䊊

2. When the clamp is loosened, move the

crossbar so the cargo can be posi-

tioned on the crossbar 䊊

3. Tighten the crossbar adjusting screws

with the TORX® driver by turning clock-

wise.

4. Secure the cargo with rope.

5. Always check the tightness of the

crossbar adjusting screws.

To remove:

1. Loosen the adjusting screws with the

TORX® driver 䊊

1by turning counter-

clockwise 䊊

2. Rotate the clamps 䊊

3. Remove the crossbar.

4. Reverse to install.

5. Always check the tightness of the

crossbar adjusting screws.

If you hear wind noise coming from the roof

rack while driving, adjust the roof rack

crossbar to the neutral position.

MANUAL WINDOWS

(if so equipped)

The side windows can be opened or closed

by turning the hand crank on each door.

LIC3352

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-49

POWER WINDOWS (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the

driver’s or passenger’s door is opened dur-

ing this period of time, the power to the

windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side window

switch

4. Right rear passenger window

switch (Crew Cab models only)

5. Left rear passenger window switch

(Crew Cab models only)

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side

power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close the front

and rear passenger windows.

To open a window, push the switch and

hold it down. To close a window, pull the

switch and hold it up. To stop the opening

or closing function at any time, simply re-

lease the switch.

LIC1329

2-50 Instruments and controls

Front passenger’s

power window switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow. To open the window, push the switch

and hold it down 䊊

1. To close the window,

pull the switch up 䊊

Rear power window switch

(Crew Cab models only)

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding passenger

window. To open the window, push the

switch and hold it down 䊊

1. To close the

window, push the switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, push the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

WIC0260 LIC2663 LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-51

REAR SLIDING WINDOW

(if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ You must ensure all occupants and

objects are free of the rear window

area prior to and during operation.

Failure to do so may result in injury

and/or damage to the rear window

system.

∙ The rear window is not designed to

carry long items through it.

∙ Do not place objects through the

opened rear window. Do not use the

rear window as a cargo area pass-

through. This may result in damage to

the rear window system or personal

injury.

Squeeze the handles of the lever 䊊

1, then

slide the window open 䊊

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the

ignition switch is in the ON position. The

power moonroof is operational for about

45 seconds, even if the ignition switch is

turned to the ACC or OFF position. If the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s door

is opened during this period of about

45 seconds, power to the moonroof is can-

celed.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open the moonroof, push the

switch toward DOWN/OPEN 䊊

LIC3488 WIC0882

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

To fully close the moonroof, push the

switch toward UP/CLOSE 䊊

To open or close the moonroof part way,

push the switch in any direction while the

moonroof is sliding to stop it in the desired

position.

Tilting the moonroof

Close the moonroof by pushing the switch

toward UP/CLOSE 䊊

2. Release the switch,

then push the UP/CLOSE switch again to

tilt the moonroof up.

To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch

toward DOWN/OPEN 䊊

Auto-reverse function (when

closing or tilting down the

moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when the moonroof is closed or

tilted down by automatic operation when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition or for a period of time after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it moves to the

front, the moonroof will immediately open

backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the

moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions

and repeats opening or tilting up the

moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down

switch within 5 seconds after it happens;

the moonroof will fully close gradually.

Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-

roof.

WARNING

∙ In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts and

child restraints.

∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

∙ Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your moonroof checked and re-

paired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-53

The interior lights have a three-position

switch and operate regardless of ignition

switch position.

When the switch is in the ON position 䊊

the interior lights illuminate, regardless of

door position. The lights will go off after a

period of time unless the ignition switch is

in the ON position.

When the switch is in the O (DOOR) position

䊊

2, the interior lights will stay on for a period

of time when:

∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a

key or the power door lock switch while

all doors are closed and the ignition

switch is in the OFF position.

∙ The driver’s door is opened and then

closed while the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

∙ The key is removed from the ignition

switch while all doors are closed.

The lights will turn off while the timer is

activated when:

∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key

fob, a key, or the power door lock switch.

∙ The ignition switch is turned on.

The lights will turn off automatically after a

period of time while doors are open to pre-

vent the battery from becoming dis-

charged.

When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊

the interior lights do not illuminate, regard-

less of door position.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC0789

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC0792

Type C (if so equipped)

LIC0630

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-54 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

MAP LIGHTS (if so equipped)

To turn the map lights on, press the lenses.

To turn them off, press the lenses of the

lights again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

∙ Will operate most Radio Frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink® will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming pro-

cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” in this section.

LIC0791

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-55

WARNING

∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards

became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982.) A

garage door opener which cannot de-

tect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically

stop and reverse does not meet cur-

rent federal safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

∙ During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc., that you are programming.

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter

of the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming

and accurate transmission of the radio-

frequency.

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from

the HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and hand-held transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing

indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in

“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers” in this section.

LIC2365

2-56 Instruments and controls

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the in-

dicator light.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1is solid/

continuous, programming is com-

plete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink® button is

pressed and released.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly

for 2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-

vice. A second person may make the

following steps easier. Use a ladder or

other device. Do not stand on your

vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, lo-

cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer but it is usually lo-

cated near where the hanging an-

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If

there is difficulty locating the button,

reference the garage door opener’s

manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® but-

ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat

the “press/hold/release” sequence up

to three times to complete the training

process. HomeLink® should now acti-

vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

LIC2366

Instruments and controls 2-57

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties training a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Training” proce-

dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”

Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener com-

ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this

section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During training, your hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button

while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every

2 seconds until the frequency signal

has been learned. The HomeLink® indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training.

DO NOT release until the HomeLink®

indicator light flashes slowly and then

rapidly. When the indicator light flashes

rapidly, both buttons may be released.

The rapid flashing indicates successful

training. Proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the

programming procedure, remember

to plug it back in when programming is

completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate

the programmed device. To operate, sim-

ply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button. The amber indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being trans-

mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.

If HomeLink® is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position – keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

2-58 Instruments and controls

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed. For additional information, refer

to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than

20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The

new device can be activated by pressing

the HomeLink® button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink® but-

tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of

each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional infor-

mation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-59

MEMO

2-60 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys (if so equipped)..........................3-2

Doors ...........................................3-3

Locking with key..............................3-3

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-4

Locking with power door lock switch

(if so equipped) ...............................3-4

Rear doors (King Cab® models) ...............3-5

Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ........3-6

Child safety rear door lock

(if so equipped) ...............................3-6

Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-6

How to use remote keyless entry

system .......................................3-7

Hood ...........................................3-10

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-11

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-11

Steering wheel .................................3-14

Tilt operation (if so equipped)................3-14

Sun visors ......................................3-14

Vanity mirrors (if so equipped) ...............3-15

Mirrors .........................................3-15

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-15

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-16

Outside mirrors ............................. 3-17

Truck box.......................................3-18

Tailgate......................................3-18

Bed extender (if so equipped)................3-22

Tie down hooks (if so equipped) .............3-23

1. Two master keys with transponder chip

and chrome NISSAN brand symbol on

one side

2. Transponder chip

3. Key number plate

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep the

plate in a safe place (such as your wallet),

not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for duplicates by using the key num-

ber. NISSAN does not record key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of your

key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all your keys. If you still have a key,

it can duplicated without knowing the key

number.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS (if so equipped)

You can only drive your vehicle using the

master key which is registered to the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-

ponents in your vehicle. This key has a tran-

sponder chip in the key head.

The master key can be used for all the

locks.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. A NISSAN

dealer can duplicate your existing key. As

many as five NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System keys can be used with one vehicle.

You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immo-

bilizer System keys that you have to the

NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-

cause the registration process will erase

the memory of all key codes previously reg-

istered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System. After the registration process,

these components will only recognize keys

coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System during registration. Any key that is

not given to the dealer at the time of regis-

tration will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system

key, which contains an electrical tran-

sponder, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water. This could affect sys-

tem function.

LPD0348

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows and/or inad-

vertent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others and/or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and/or pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual (if so equipped)

To lock a door, turn the key toward the front

of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock, turn the key

toward the rear 䊊

Driver’s side and Passenger’s side

(if so equipped)

WPD0311

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

Power (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to

lock or unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the

vehicle locks all the doors.

Turning the key 1 time toward the rear 䊊

2of

the vehicle unlocks that door. From that

position, returning the key to neutral 䊊

(where the key can only be removed and

inserted) and turning it toward the rear

again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors

䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊

then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH (if so equipped)

To lock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or passenger’s

side) to the lock position 䊊

1. When locking

the door this way, be certain not to leave

the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push

the door lock switch (driver’s or passen-

ger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Driver’s side

LPD0240

Inside lock

LPD0298

Driver’s and Passenger’s side

WPD0381

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driver’s

side) is moved to the lock position with the

key in the ignition switch and any door

opens, all doors will lock and then unlock

automatically. This helps to prevent the

keys from being accidently locked inside

the vehicle.

REAR DOORS (King Cab® models)

1. Open the driver’s or passenger’s door.

From the outside, pull the door handle

䊊

toward you.

LPD0278 LPD0312

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3. Open the door to the desired position.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

(if so equipped)

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph

(24 km/h).

∙ All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park)

position, when the ignition is turned to

the OFF position, or when the key is re-

moved from the ignition.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

(if so equipped)

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position,

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The remote keyless entry key fob

transmits radio waves when the but-

tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra-

dio waves may affect aircraft naviga-

tion and communication systems. Do

not operate the remote keyless entry

key fob while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated un-

intentionally when the unit is stored

for a flight.

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn

the interior light on, and activate the panic

alarm by using the key fob from outside the

vehicle.

Be sure to remove the key from the ve-

hicle before locking the doors.

The key fob can operate at a distance of

approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.

The effective distance depends upon the

conditions around the vehicle.

WPD0313 WPD0037

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

As many as five key fobs can be used with

one vehicle. For information concerning

the purchase and use of additional key

fobs, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

The key fob will not function when:

∙ The battery is discharged.

∙ The distance between the vehicle and

the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m).

The panic alarm will not activate when

the key is in the ignition switch.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the key fob:

∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con-

tains electrical components, to come

into contact with water or salt water.

This could affect the system function.

∙ Do not drop the key fob.

∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply

against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the key fob.

∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If

the key fob gets wet, immediately

wipe until it is completely dry.

∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex-

tended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C)

∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key

holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the key fob near equip-

ment that produces a magnetic field,

such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec-

ommends erasing the ID code of that

key fob. This will prevent the key fob

from unauthorized use to unlock the

vehicle. For information regarding the

erasing procedure, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS

ENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors

1. Close all windows.

2. Remove the key from the ignition

switch.

3. Close the hood and all doors.

4. Press the button on the key fob.

All the doors lock. The hazard warning

lights flash twice and the horn beeps

once to indicate all doors are locked.

LPD0209

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

∙ When the button is pressed

with all doors locked, the hazard

warning lights flash twice and the

horn beeps once as a reminder that

the doors are already locked.

∙ If a door is open and you press

the button, the doors will lock

but the horn will not beep and the

hazard lights will not flash.

The horn may or may not beep. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Silencing the

horn beep feature” in this section.

Unlocking doors

Press the button on the key fob once.

∙ Only the driver’s door unlocks.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if

all doors are completely closed with the

ignition switch in any position except

the ON position.

∙ The interior lights illuminate for a period

of time when the interior light switch is

in the normal operation position.

Press the button on the key fob again

within 5 seconds.

∙ All doors unlock.

∙ The hazard warning lights flash once if

all doors are completely closed.

The interior lights can be turned off without

waiting by inserting the key into the ignition

switch and placing the ignition switch in

the ON or START position, locking the doors

with the key fob or pushing the interior light

switch to the OFF position.

Auto relock

When the button on the key fob is

pressed, all doors will lock automatically

within 1 minute unless one of the following

operations is performed:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ A key is inserted into the ignition switch

and the switch is cycled from OFF to ON.

LPD0210

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening automatic windows

(if so equipped)

The key fob allows you to open windows

equipped with automatic operation.

∙ To open the windows, press the

button on the key fob for longer than

3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the key fob.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the key fob.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the key fob for longer

than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time.

∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

Using the interior lights

Press the button on the key fob once

to turn on the interior lights.

For additional information, refer to “Interior

lights” in the “Instruments and controls”

section in this manual.

LPD2497

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be

deactivated using the key fob.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three

times to confirm that the horn beep fea-

ture has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

located below the driver’s side instru-

ment panel. The hood will spring up

slightly.

2. Push the lever 䊊

2at the front of the

hood to the side as illustrated with your

fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Insert the support rod into the slot on

the underside of the hood 䊊

When closing the hood, return the hood rod

to its original position. Lower the hood ap-

proximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch

and release it. This allows proper engage-

ment of the hood latch.

LPD0262 LPD0302

HOOD

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving.

Failure to do so could cause the hood

to fly open and result in an accident.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

LPD2698

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage will be displayed if the fuel-filler

cap is not properly tightened. It may

take a few driving trips for the mes-

sage to be displayed. Failure to

tighten the fuel-filler cap properly af-

ter the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage is displayed may cause the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to

illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”

in the “Instruments and Controls” sec-

tion in this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

Fuel recommendation

(for VQ40DE models):

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information,

refer to “Fuel recommendation (for

VQ40DE models)” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel

recommendation (if so equipped):

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on up to E-85 fuel.

Fuel system or other damage can oc-

cur if up to E-85 fuel is used in vehicles

that are not designed to run on E-85

fuel. For additional information, refer

to “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-

ommendation” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this

manual.

Fuel recommendation

(for QR25DE models):

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation (for QR25DE mod-

els)” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

For additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation (for QR25DE models),”

“Fuel recommendation (for VQ40DE mod-

els)” or “Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel rec-

ommendation” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Loop the tether strap around the hook

䊊

1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message

displays in the odometer when the fuel-

filler cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few

driving trips for the message to be dis-

played. To turn off the warning message,

perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

described above as soon as possible.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the loose fuel cap change/reset

button 䊊

Ain the meter for about one

second to turn off the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning message after tightening the

fuel-filler cap.

For additional information, refer to “Meters

and gauges” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

LPD2699 LRS2004

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

TILT OPERATION (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates. Al-

ways sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat

belts.

Pull the lock lever toward the driver and

hold it to adjust the steering wheel up or

down to the desired position.

Release the lock lever to lock the steering

wheel in place.

LPD0304

WPD0344

STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down 䊊

1the main sun visor.

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor from the center

mount and swing the visor to the side

䊊

3. To extend 䊊

3the sun visor, slide in or

out as needed (if so equipped).

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward. VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and

turn on when the mirror cover is open.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

WPD0307 WPD0126

MIRRORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it au-

tomatically dims during night time condi-

tions and according to the intensity of the

headlights of the vehicle following you. The

automatic anti-glare sensor 䊊

1is activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare sensor feature is

operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-

sors or apply glass cleaner to the sen-

sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensors, resulting in improper op-

eration.

The indicator light will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

press the button as described:

∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press

the button. The indicator light will

turn off.

∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press

the button again. The indicator

light will turn on.

For information on HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver (if so equipped) operation, refer

to the “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

For additional information about the com-

pass 䊊

3and compass features, refer to

“Compass and outside temperature dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2505

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2504

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

Manual control type

(if so equipped)

The outside mirrors can be moved in any

direction for a better rear view.

Electric control type

(if so equipped)

The outside mirror remote control will op-

erate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the right

or left mirror. Move the large switch 䊊

2to

adjust each mirror to the desired position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to the center

(neutral) position to prevent accidentally

moving the mirror.

WPD0170 LPD0237

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Foldable outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to

defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-

ibility. For additional information, refer to

“Rear window or outside mirror defroster

switch (if so equipped)” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

TAILGATE

Opening the tailgate

Pull the tailgate handle upward and lower

the tailgate. The support cables hold the

tailgate open.

When closing the tailgate, make sure the

latches are securely locked.

Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate

down, unless equipped with NISSAN’s

Bed Extender (accessory) or equivalent

in the extended position.

For additional information on proper truck

box loading, refer to “Vehicle loading infor-

mation” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it

is in the folded position. Use of these

areas by passengers without proper

restraints could result in serious injury

or death in an accident or sudden

stop.

∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area inside a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped

with seats and seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LPD0259 LPD0270

TRUCK BOX

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Disconnecting the rear camera (if

so equipped)

Before removing the tailgate disconnect

the rear camera by performing the follow-

ing:

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear

camera connector bracket 䊊

1located

on the rear sill.

2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊

from the sill by pressing the locking tab

inward, in the direction shown, while

pulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness

䊊

3by pressing inward on the locking

tab, in the direction shown, while pulling

the connectors apart. Hold the con-

nector firmly to prevent the connector

in the chassis harness from falling into

the sill.

4. Take the chassis plug and bracket from

the glove box and connect them to the

chassis wiring harness to avoid con-

tamination to the terminals which will

lead to malfunction of the rear camera.

5. Insert the bracket back into the sill.

6. Take the tailgate plug from the glove

box and connect it to the tailgate wir-

ing harness to avoid contamination

which will lead to malfunction of the

rear camera.

7. Remove the tailgate. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Removing the tail-

gate” in this section.

LPD2097

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Removing the tailgate

1. Release the tailgate support cables.

CAUTION

∙ The tailgate is heavy. Two people

should remove or install it. Be careful

not to drop it during removal.

∙ After releasing the support cables, do

not let the tailgate rest on the

bumper.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle.

3. Pull the tailgate out from the right side

hinge.

4. Slide the tailgate out of the left side

hinge.

Installing the tailgate

1. Insert the tailgate into the left side

hinge.

2. Hold the tailgate at a 15 degree angle

and insert into the right side hinge.

3. Continue to hold the tailgate at a 15

degree angle and attach the tailgate

support cables.

4. Close the tailgate securely.

LPD2208

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Connecting the rear camera

(if so equipped)

Before closing the tailgate reconnect the

rear camera by performing the following:

1. After attaching the rear tailgate to the

truck, keep the tailgate open and check

that the tailgate harness is not hanging

below the tailgate.

2. Remove the connector bracket 䊊

from the sill by pressing the locking tab

inward, in the direction shown, while

pulling the bracket apart.

3. Disconnect the chassis plug and

bracket from the chassis wiring har-

ness 䊊

3. Keep the connector and

bracket in a safe place such as the

glove box.

4. Disconnect the tailgate plug from the

tailgate wiring harness. Keep the tail-

gate plug in a safe place such as the

glove box.

5. Connect the tailgate wiring harness to

the chassis wiring harness.

6. Securely fix the rear camera connector

bracket 䊊

1to the rear sill.

7. Close the tailgate securely.

Locking the tailgate

To lock the tailgate, turn the key toward the

passenger side of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock,

turn the key toward the driver side 䊊

LPD2097 LPD0272

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

BED EXTENDER (if so equipped)

CAUTION

∙ Do not overload the bed extender.

Maximum load on the open tailgate is

200 lbs. (890N).

∙ Evenly distribute and properly secure

all cargo.

∙ Do not use the bed extender or tail-

gate to secure cargo.

Positioning the bed extender

To use the bed extender in the inward po-

sition perform the following:

1. Rotate the bed extender 䊊

1toward the

cab of the truck.

2. If necessary, remove tethers from the

tailgate latch.

3. Tighten the knobs to secure the ex-

tender into the desired position.

4. Close the tailgate.

5. Place cargo inside the bed extender in

the truck bed.

6. Properly secure the cargo.

LPD0480

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To use the bed extender in the outward

position perform the following:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Rotate the bed extender 䊊

2away from

the cab of the truck until the extender

sits on the tailgate.

3. Lock the buckles 䊊

3into the tailgate

latch on both sides.

The bed extender can be adjusted in the

outward position by moving the extender

along the rail.

NOTE:

Use care when rotating extender, buck-

les may come in contact with the truck

bed railing.

Removing and installing the bed

extender

To remove or install the bed extender per-

form the following:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Rotate the bed extender into a vertical

position and lift straight up (to remove)

or lower straight down (to install).

To store the bed extender in the front of the

truck when not in use perform the follow-

ing:

1. Position the sliding brackets past the

center of the wheel well.

2. Re-install the extender into the brack-

ets (see above).

3. Rotate the extender to the inward po-

sition.

4. Push the brackets forward until the ex-

tender comes in contact with the front

wall of the truck box.

TIE DOWN HOOKS (if so equipped)

For your convenience, tie down hooks are

placed at each corner of the truck box.

These may be used to help secure cargo

loaded into the truck box.

∙ The weight of the cargo load must be

evenly distributed over both the front

and the rear axles.

∙ All cargo should be securely fastened

with ropes or straps to prevent it from

shifting or sliding within the vehicle.

LPD0479 LTI0102

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems

Control panel buttons — color screen with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..............4-4

How to use the touch-screen.................4-5

HowtousetheBACKbutton.................4-7

How to use the button.................4-7

button..................................4-9

How to use the ON-OFF button/

VOL (volume) control knob ...................4-9

How to use the CAMERA button ..............4-9

RearView Monitor ..............................4-10

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-11

How to read the displayed lines..............4-12

Difference between predicted and

actual distances.............................4-12

Adjusting the screen ........................4-14

RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-15

System maintenance........................4-16

Vents...........................................4-17

Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) .................................4-17

Controls .....................................4-18

Controls .....................................4-19

Heater operation ............................4-20

Air conditioner operation ....................4-21

Air flow charts ...............................4-22

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) .................................4-26

Automatic operation ........................4-29

Manual operation ...........................4-30

Operating tips ...............................4-31

Servicing air conditioner........................4-31

Audio system...................................4-31

Radio........................................4-31

FM radio reception ..........................4-32

AM radio reception ..........................4-32

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .....4-32

Audio operation precautions ................4-33

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player (if so equipped) .......................4-40

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (Type A) (if so equipped) ..........4-46

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (Type B) (if so equipped) ..........4-52

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port (models without Navigation

System) (if so equipped) .....................4-59

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port (models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped) ..............................4-61

iPod®* player operation without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-63

iPod®* player operation with Navigation

System (if so equipped)......................4-65

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-69

Bluetooth® streaming audio with

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-70

CD care and cleaning........................4-71

Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-72

Antenna.....................................4-73

NissanConnect® Mobile Apps (if so equipped). . . 4-73

Registering with NissanConnect®

Mobile Apps .................................4-73

Connect Phone..............................4-74

Application Download .......................4-74

Siri® Eyes Free ..................................4-74

Requirements ...............................4-75

Siri® Activation...............................4-75

Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-75

Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings

(models without navigation system).........4-76

Changing Siri® Eyes Free settings

(models with navigation system) ............4-76

Troubleshooting guide ......................4-77

Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-79

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

without Navigation System (if so equipped).....4-80

Regulatory information......................4-82

Using the system............................4-82

Control buttons .............................4-83

Connecting procedure ......................4-84

Voice commands ...........................4-85

Making a call ................................4-87

Receiving a call ..............................4-87

During a call .................................4-87

Ending a call.................................4-88

Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-88

Bluetooth® settings .........................4-90

Manual control ..............................4-91

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with

Navigation System (if so equipped) .............4-92

Regulatory information......................4-94

Voice commands ...........................4-94

Connecting procedure ......................4-95

Vehicle phonebook..........................4-95

Making a call ................................4-95

Receiving a call ..............................4-96

During a call .................................4-96

Ending a call.................................4-96

Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-96

Bluetooth® settings .........................4-98

Phone settings ..............................4-99

Troubleshooting guide .....................4-100

NISSAN Voice Recognition System

(if so equipped) ................................4-101

Using the system...........................4-101

System features ............................4-102

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands...........................4-103

Navigation System voice commands .......4-104

Audio system voice commands ............4-104

Information voice commands ..............4-104

My Apps voice commands .................4-104

Help voice commands......................4-105

Troubleshooting guide .....................4-105

WARNING

∙ Positioning of the heating or air con-

ditioning controls and display con-

trols should not be done while driving

in order that full attention may be

given to the driving operation.

∙ Do not disassemble or modify this

system. If you do, it may result in acci-

dents, fire, or electrical shock.

∙ Do not use this system if you notice

any abnormality, such as a frozen

screen or lack of sound. Continued

use of the system may result in acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

∙ In case you notice any foreign object

in the system hardware, spill liquid on

it, or notice smoke or smell coming

from it, stop using the system imme-

diately. Ignoring such conditions may

lead to accidents, fire or electrical

shock. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

1. MAP button*

2. Display screen

3. button**

4. button

5. (brightness control) button

6. BACK button

7. ENTER/AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. ON-OFF button/VOL (volume) control

knob

LHA3138

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR

SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

9. CAMERA button

10. NAV button*

* For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual

regarding the Navigation system control

buttons.

** For additional information, refer to the

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

with Navigation System” in this section.

When you use this system, make sure the

engine is running.

If you use the system with the engine not

running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long

time, it will discharge the battery, and

the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer

to a key shown only on the display. These

keys can be selected by touching the

screen.

HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION

∙ The glass display screen may break if

it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If

the glass screen breaks, do not touch

it. Doing so could result in an injury.

∙ To clean the display, never use a rough

cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any

kind of solvent or paper towel with a

chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Con-

tact with liquid will cause the system

to malfunction.

To help ensure safe driving, some functions

cannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not avail-

able while driving will be grayed out or

muted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and then

operate the navigation system.

WARNING

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

∙ Avoid using vehicle features that

could distract you. If distracted, you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Touch-screen operation

Menu Item Result

Selecting the item Touch an item to select . To select the “Audio” key, touch the “Audio” key on the screen. Press the BACK button to

return to the previous screen.

Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “⫺” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page.

Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page.

Inputting characters Touch the letter or number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.

123/ABC Changes the available character set to numbers.

Space Inserts a space.

Delete Deletes the last inputted character with one touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all of the

characters.

OK Completes the character input.

LHA3748

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Touch-screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry,

soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-

sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-

gent with a soft cloth. Never spray the

screen with water or detergent. Dampen

the cloth first and then wipe the screen.

HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTON

Press the BACK button to return to the pre-

vious screen.

HOW TO USE THE BUTTON

For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual

regarding the “SiriusXM Travel Link” and

“SiriusXM Traffic” features.

For additional information, refer to

“NissanConnect® Mobile Apps” in this sec-

tion.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Voice Recognition System” in this section.

To select and/or adjust several functions,

features and modes that are available for

your vehicle:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the desired item.

LHA2773 LHA3748

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

Menu item Result

Audio For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section.

Navigation For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Phone & Bluetooth For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation System” in this section.

System Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will

appear.

Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display.

Brightness Adjusts the brightness of the display.

Display Mode Adjusts to fit the level of lighting in the vehicle. Touch key to cycle through options. “Day” and “Night” modes are

suited for the respective times of day while “Auto” controls the display automatically.

Scroll Direction Adjusts the direction of the menu scroll. Choose to either move up or down.

Clock/Date Touch this key to adjust the time and date.

Time Format The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.

Date Format Select from two possible formats for displaying the day, month, and year.

Clock Mode Adjust the mode for the clock. “Auto” uses the system’s GPS to automatically maintain the time. “Manual” allows

you to set the clock using the “Set Clock Manually” key. Select a time zone using the “Time Zone” key.

Set Clock Manually Adjust the clock manually, Touch the “+” or “-” keys to adjust the hours, minutes, day, month and year up or down.

“Clock Mode” must be set to manual for this option to be available.

Daylight Savings

Time

Adjusts the daylight savings time on or off.

Time Zone Choose the applicable time zone from the list.

Language Touch this key to change the language on the display.

Camera Settings Touch this key to change the camera settings.

Display Mode Touch this key to select the touch-screen display mode (day, night, or automatic).

Brightness Adjust touch-screen brightness.

Contrast Adjust touch-screen contrast.

Color Adjust touch-screen color.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu item Result

Temperature Unit Touch this key to change the temperature unit being displayed (Fahrenheit or Celsius).

Touchscreen click Toggles the touch-screen click feature on or off. When activated a click sound will be heard every time a key on the

screen is touched.

System Beeps Toggle the system beep tones feature on or off. When activated, a beep sound will be heard when a pop-up mes-

sage appears on the screen or a button on the unit (such as the button) is pressed and held for 2 seconds.

Return to Factory Settings/Clear

Memory

Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.

Software Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information.

Minimize Voice Feedback Touch this key to turn ON or OFF the control voice feedback.

System Software Version Touch this key to display software version information.

Traffic Touch this key display the traffic settings. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Own-

er’s Manual.

SXM Touch this key to display SXM status information. For additional information, refer to the “Audio System” in this

section.

BUTTON

To change the display brightness, press

the button. Pressing the button again

will change the display to auto or night

display mode.

If no operation is performed within 5 sec-

onds, the display will return to the previous

display.

Press and hold the button for more

than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press

the button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE THE ON-OFF

BUTTON/VOL (volume)

CONTROL KNOB

Press the ON-OFF button to turn audio

function on and off. Turn the volume con-

trol knob to adjust audio volume.

HOW TO USE THE

CAMERA BUTTON

For additional information, refer to “Rear-

View Monitor” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

1. ENTER/SETTING button

(models without navigation)

2. CAMERA button

(models with navigation)

LHA3670

REARVIEW MONITOR

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. Press the CAMERA button (if so

equipped) while in the R (Reverse) position

to cycle through guideline options. The ra-

dio can still be heard while the RearView

Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located next to

the tailgate handle 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

LHA3671

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA2944

LHA3672

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown farther than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the

object in the display. However, the vehicle

may hit the object if it projects over the

actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

LHA3673 LHA4513 LHA3674

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

The procedure for adjusting the display

settings of the screen differs depending on

the type of screen present on the vehicle.

For vehicles without navigation system

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (Reverse)

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

3. The screen will display the Brightness

settings.

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL

knob to adjust the setting up or down.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button

again to display the Contrast settings.

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL

knob to adjust the setting up or down.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button to

complete the adjustment.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the

RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

Models without navigation system

LHA3639

Models with navigation system

LHA3679

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

For vehicles with navigation system

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (Reverse)

2. Press the button on the control

panel.

3. The screen will display the Night set-

tings.

4. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-

ting up or down.

5. Press the button again to access

the Auto settings.

6. Turn the TUNE knob to adjust the set-

ting up or down.

∙ Do not adjust the display settings of the

RearView Monitor while the vehicle is

moving.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the tailgate is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled on the tailgate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, RearView Monitor may not dis-

play objects clearly. Clean the camera.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

LHA3671

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Adjust air flow direction for the vents di-

rected at the driver’s and passenger’s side

windows 䊊

1, driver and passenger 䊊

2,or

center 䊊

3by moving the vent slide and/or

vent assemblies. Open or close the driver

and passenger vents by using the dial.

Move the dial toward the to open the

vents or toward the to close them.

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

LHA4512

VENTS HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

1. Fan speed control dial

2. Front window defroster button

3. Rear window defroster switch

(if so equipped)

4. Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Max A/C button

7. Air flow control buttons

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

Type A (if so equipped)

WHA1406

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONTROLS

1. Fan speed control dial

2. Front window defroster button

3. Outside mirror defroster switch

(if so equipped)

4. Air recirculation button

5. Temperature control dial

6. Max A/C button

7. Air flow control buttons

8. A/C (air conditioner) button

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on

and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control dial or buttons allow

you to select the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling

(air conditioning).

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from

defroster outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Type B (if so equipped)

LHA3167

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

Air recirculation button

ON position (Indicator light on)

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position

when:

∙ driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioner.

OFF position (Indicator light off)

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment and distributed through the

selected outlet.

Use the OFF position for normal heater or

air conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position and press

the button to turn on the air condi-

tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window or outside mirror

defroster switch (if so equipped)

For additional information about the rear

window or outside mirror defroster switch,

refer to “Rear window or outside mirror de-

froster switch.” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to

the foot outlets. Some air also flows from

the defrost outlets.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side

and center vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on the

button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the

windows, turn the fan control dial

to the highest setting and the tempera-

ture control to the full HOT position.

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance. The

recirculation mode cannot be activated

in the position.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to

the side and center vents and to the front

and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion. The indicator light on

the button will go off.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windshield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). If the air flow control

button is selected for more than 1 min-

ute, the air conditioning system will

continue to operate until the fan

control dial is turned to OFF, the vehicle

is shut off, or the A/C button is used to

turn off the compressor even if the air

flow control dial is turned to a position

other than the position. This de-

humidifies the air which helps defog the

windshield. The mode automati-

cally turns off, allowing outside air to be

drawn into the passenger compart-

ment to further improve the defogging

performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield.

This improves heater operation.

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position, and press

the button to activate the air condi-

tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-

ing and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

Press the button to the OFF position.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the button.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

∙ For quick cooling when the outside

temperature is high, press the

button to the ON position. Be sure to

return the to the OFF position for

normal cooling. The indicator light on

the button will go off. You may

also select MAX A/C for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

3. Press the button on.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

∙ When the or are selected, the air

conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36° F (2° C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

∙ The air conditioner is always on in

the mode, regardless of whether

the indicator light is on or off.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Operating tips

∙ Keep the windows and moonroof (if so

equipped) closed while the air condi-

tioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for two or

three minutes with the windows open

to vent hot air from the passenger

compartment. Then, close the win-

dows. This allows the air conditioner to

cool the interior more quickly.

∙The air conditioning system should

be operated for approximately

10 minutes at least once a month.

This helps prevent damage to the

system due to lack of lubrication.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions

as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

∙If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and

dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK

heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re-

circulation ( ) button should always

be in the OFF position for heating and

defrosting.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WHA0916 LHA4443

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

LHA4444 LHA4453

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA4446

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

1. Driver temperature control dial

2. A/C (air conditioner) button

3. Front window defroster button

4. Fan speed control dial

5. OFF button

6. Fresh air intake button

7. Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial

9. DUAL button

10. Air flow control buttons

11. AUTO button

Type A (if so equipped)

LHA2886

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Driver temperature control dial

2. A/C (air conditioner) button

3. Front window defroster button

4. Fan speed control dial

5. OFF button

6. Rear window defroster switch

7. Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial

9. DUAL button

10. Air flow control buttons

11. AUTO button

Type B (if so equipped)

LHA2611

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

1. Driver temperature control dial

2. A/C (air conditioner) button

3. Front window defroster button

4. Fan speed control dial

5. OFF button

6. Outside mirror defroster switch

7. Air recirculation button

8. Passenger temperature control dial

9. DUAL button

10. Air flow control buttons

11. AUTO button

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls

to activate the air conditioner.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

Type C (if so equipped)

LHA3168

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling or heating (auto)

This mode may be normally used all year

round as the system automatically works

to keep a constant temperature. Air flow

distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

Driver and passenger temperatures

can be set independently. Press DUAL

to activate dual climate control func-

tions. Turn the passenger’s side tem-

perature control dial to the left or right

to set the desired passenger’s tem-

perature.

∙ Adjust the temperature dial to about

75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution, fan speed

and A/C on/off are also controlled auto-

matically.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the vents in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate.When

you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise,

the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or

defogging

1. Press the defroster control

switch to turn the system on. The indi-

cator light in the button will illuminate.

2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or

right to set the desired temperature.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, turn the manual fan

control to the maximum position.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, press the AUTO button to

return to the auto mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

∙ When the control is activated, the

air conditioner will automatically be

turned on at outside temperatures

above 36°F (2°C). If in defrost mode for

more than 1 minute, the air conditioning

system will continue to operate until the

fan control is turned OFF, the vehicle is

shut off or the A/C button is used to

turn off the compressor even if an air

flow button other than is se-

lected. This dehumidifies the air which

helps defog the windshield. The air re-

circulation mode automatically turns

off, allowing outside air to be drawn into

the passenger compartment to further

improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the fan speed control dial to

manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic mode.

The air recirculation cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the

front defogging mode.

Fresh air intake (if so equipped)

Press the fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger com-

partment. The indicator light on the

button will come on.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan speed

control dial to the desired position and

press the button to turn on the air

conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner,

press the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Press the air flow control buttons to manu-

ally control air flow and select the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and

foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the OFF button.

Rear window or outside mirror

defroster switch (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window or outside mirror defroster switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

OPERATING TIPS

The sunload sensor 䊊

1, located on the top

center of the instrument panel, helps the

system maintain a constant temperature.

Do not put anything on or around this sen-

sor.

∙ When the engine coolant temperature

and outside air temperature are low, the

air flow from the foot outlets may not

operate for a maximum of 150 seconds.

However, this is not a malfunction. After

the coolant temperature warms up, air

flow from the foot outlets will operate

normally.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON

position, press the (power) or ON•OFF

button to turn the radio on.If you listen to the

radio with the engine not running, the igni-

tion should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio transmit-

ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other

external influences. Intermittent changes

in reception quality normally are caused by

these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

LIC0515

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-

ference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –

30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range

than stereo FM. External influences may

sometimes interfere with FM station re-

ception even if the FM station is within 25

mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-

low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of

the same characteristics as light. For ex-

ample, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position (usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the treble

control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals,direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics,

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric tur-

bulence even in areas where no obstacles

exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than

10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the

vehicle outside of any metal or large build-

ing for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and

“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band

option is selected unless optional satellite

receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-

tion is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-

lite antenna.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-

tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

∙ Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD player.

∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

∙Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

∙During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the

CD and dehumidify or ventilate the

player completely.

∙The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

∙The CD player sometimes cannot

function when the compartment

temperature is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

LHA0099

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

∙Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

∙CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with fin-

gerprints may not work properly.

∙The following CDs may not work

properly:

∙Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

∙Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

∙Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

∙Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

∙3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

∙CDs that are not round

∙CDs with a paper label

∙CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

∙This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

∙If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC

∙Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

∙Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pressing the EJECT button.

After a short time, reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

UNPLAYABLE

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA (if so

equipped) CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital

audio file format. This format allows for

near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction

of the size of normal audio files. MP3

conversion of an audio track from CD-

ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-

mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-

ceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant

and irrelevant parts of a sound signal

that the human ear doesn’t hear.

∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is

a compressed audio format created by

Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file compres-

sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-

age of more digital audio tracks in the

same amount of space when com-

pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-

ity.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital mu-

sic file. The size and quality of a com-

pressed digital audio file is determined

by the bit rate used when encoding the

file.

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples

of a signal are converted from analog to

digital (A/D conversion) per second.

∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is called

a single session, and writing more than

once is called a multisession.

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title, art-

ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-

tion, etc.ID3 tag information is displayed

on the Artist/song title line on the dis-

play.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks and trademarks in the

United States of America and other coun-

tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

∙ The names of folders not containing

MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the

display.

∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

∙ The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing soft-

ware. Therefore, the files might not play

in the desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling

frequency

8kHz-48kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling

frequency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),

05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of

characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long

time before the music

starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music

starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit

rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to

the next song when

playing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back

in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-

sired order.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

memory devices. To format a USB device,

use a personal computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without im-

ages for regulatory reasons, even when the

vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB

memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not

be supported by this system.

∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly.

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may

not appear properly in the display. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

General notes for USB use

∙ For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer’s owner informa-

tion regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod® use

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a check mark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it

is connected during a seek operation. In

this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod®.

∙ Large video files cause slow responses

in an iPod®. The vehicle center display

may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-

dio system.

∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before using

the Bluetooth® audio.

∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio will vary depending on the de-

vices. Make sure how to operate your

audio device before using it with this

system.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped

under the following conditions:

∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

∙ Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice in an area surrounded by metal or

far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module to prevent tone quality degra-

dation and wireless connection disrup-

tion.

∙ While an audio device is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®

Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon and

Bosch.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. FM•AM button

3. CD insert slot

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK/TRACK buttons

7. iPod MENU button

8. BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING button and

TUNE/FOLDER control knob

10. Station select (1–6) buttons

11. RDM button

12. RPT button

13. VOL (volume) knob /

(power) button

14. DISP button

15. MEDIA button

16. CD button

LHA3026

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and

right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Adjust Allows the user to set time manually.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sensitive Vol. (volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the

more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting

of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Auto Source Change Select ON or OFF for the Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is

plugged into USB port, radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change

OFF: when device is plugged into USB port, radio will stay on currently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER control knob

to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display

will automatically reappear.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Set

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select

“Clock Adjust”.

3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust

hours.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/FOLDER knob to ad-

just minutes.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

8. Press the BACK button to finish.

DISP button

The display screen can be turned off by

pressing the DISP button. You can listen to

music while the display is off. If you want to

turn the screen on, either press the DISP

button or press the FM·AM, CD or MEDIA

button.

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information,refer to

“iPod® player operation without Navigation

System” in this section.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to

the previous menu screen.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK button or

TRACK button to tune from low to high or

high to low frequencies and to stop at the

next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(six for FM1, six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press

and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset

number is updated on the display and

the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK/TRACK

button or for 1.5 seconds while

the compact disc is playing to reverse or

fast forward the track being played. The

compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/TRACK button several times

to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/TRACK button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/TRACK but-

ton several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,

the first track on the disc is played. If the last

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will

eject and the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will be ejected further for easier CD

removal. If the disc is not removed within

20 seconds, the disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation without Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models without Navigation System)” in this

section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-

gation System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (Type

A) (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. RPT button

3. RDM button

4. Display screen

5. SCAN button

6. SEEK/CAT buttons

7. iPod MENU button

8. BACK button

9. ENTER/SETTING button and

TUNE/SCROLL control knob

10. Station select (1–6) buttons

11. VOL (volume) knob /

(power) button

12. DISP button

13. MEDIA button

14. XM button*

15. FM•AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the XM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii or Guam.

LHA4427

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and

right speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock Adjust Allows the user to set time manually.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sensitive Vol. (volume) Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the

more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting

of 0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Auto Source Change Select ON or OFF for the Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when device is

plugged into USB port, radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change

OFF: when device is plugged into USB port, radio will stay on currently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob

to select the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display

will automatically reappear.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Clock Set

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Clock Adjust”.

3. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to adjust

hours.

5. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

6. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to ad-

just minutes.

7. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

8. Press the BACK button to finish.

DISP button

The display screen can be turned off by

pressing the DISP button. You can listen to

music while the display is off. If you want to

turn the screen on, either press the DISP

button or press the FM·AM, CD or MEDIA

button.

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information,refer to

“iPod® player operation without Navigation

System” in this section.

BACK button

Press the BACK button to return to

the previous menu screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

XM band select

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station played will also come on

when the (power) button is pressed

on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-

lite radio reception will not be available un-

less an optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satel-

lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK tuning

Press the SEEK button or CAT

button to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(six for FM1, six for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press

and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset

number is updated on the display and

the sound is briefly muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button

or for 1.5 seconds while the compact

disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The compact disc plays

at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is re-

leased, the compact disc returns to normal

play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT button several times to

skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,

the first track on the disc is played. If the last

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

EJECT button

When the button is pressed with a

compact disc loaded, the compact disc will

eject and the last source will be played.

When the button is pressed twice

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will be ejected further for easier CD

removal. If the disc is not removed within

20 seconds, the disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation without Navigation Sys-

tem” in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port

(models without Navigation System)” in this

section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio without Navi-

gation System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER

(Type B) (if so equipped)

1. CD eject button

2. FM-AM button

3. AUX button

4. CD insert slot

5. Backward seek button and

Forward seek button

6. BACK button

7. AUDIO button / TUNE knob

8. Display screen

9. ON-OFF button /

VOL (volume) control knob

10. CD button

11. SXM button*

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the SXM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” regarding all opera-

tion precautions in this section.

LHA2895

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

ON-OFF button / VOL (volume) control

knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the ON-OFF button

while the system is off to call up the mode

(radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or

iPod®) that was playing immediately before

the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the ON-OFF

button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

Audio settings

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Audio” key.

Use the touch-screen to adjust the follow-

ing items to the desired setting:

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Speed Sensitive Vol. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the

speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “ 0 ” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the vol-

ume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Volume Level Controls the volume level of incoming sound when an auxiliary device is connected to the system. Avail-

able options are Low (Quiet), Medium, and High (Loud).

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the AUDIO button and turning the TUNE knob to select the item to adjust.

When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the AUDIO button until the display returns to the

main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

SXM settings

To view the SXM settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “SXM” key.

The signal strength, activation status and

other information are displayed on the

screen.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →P1→FM1 →FM→P2

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown

on the screen during FM stereo reception.

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio automatically changes from ste-

reo to monaural reception.

SXM band select

Pressing the SXM button will change the

band as follows:

SXM1* →SXM2* →SXM3* →SXM1* (satellite,

if so equipped)

When the SXM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the last station

played.

The last station played will also come on

when the ON-OFF button is pressed to turn

the radio on.

*When the SXM button is pressed, the sat-

ellite radio mode will be skipped unless an

optional satellite receiver and antenna are

installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite Radio

service subscription is active. Satellite radio

is not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the SXM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

While the radio is in SXM mode, the opera-

tion can be controlled through the touch-

screen. Touch the “Categories” key to dis-

play a list of categories. Touch a category

displayed on the list to display options

within that category.

Tuning with the touch-screen

When in AM or FM mode, the radio can be

tuned using the touch-screen. To bring up

the visual tuner, touch the “Tune” key on the

lower right corner of the screen. A screen

appears with a bar running from low fre-

quencies on the left to high frequencies on

the right. Touch the screen at the location

of the frequency you wish to tune and the

station will change to that frequency. To

return to the regular radio display screen,

touch the “OK” key.

Tuning with the TUNE knob

The radio can also be manually tuned us-

ing the TUNE knob. When in FM or AM mode,

turn the TUNE knob to the left for lower

frequencies or to the right for higher fre-

quencies. When in SXM mode, turn the

TUNE knob to change the channel.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SEEK tuning

When in FM or AM mode, press the

or seek buttons to tune from low to

high or high to low frequencies and to stop

at the next broadcasting station.

When in SXM mode, press the

or seek buttons to change the cat-

egory.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(six for FM1, six for FM2) and six stations can

be set for the AM band. Eighteen stations

can be set for the SXM band (six for SXM1, six

for SXM2 & six SXM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button or

choose the radio band SXM1, SXM2 &

SXM3 using the SXM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual or seek tuning. Press and hold

any of the desired station memory but-

tons (1 – 6) until a beep sound is heard.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Presets can also be selected by touching

the desired preset number on the screen.

LHA2899

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Smart Favorites Preset Setup

(if so equipped)

The Smart Favorites feature allows the

user to designate presets, within the SXM1,

SXM2 and SXM3 bands, as their Smart Fa-

vorites. When any of the Smart Favorite

presets are selected, the current track on

that station will play from the beginning of

the song.

To program a Smart Favorite preset:

1. Press the SXM button.

2. Touch the “Setup” key.

3. Touch the “Tune Start” key to activate

(ON) or deactivate (OFF) Smart Favor-

ites.

4. Touch the “Add Preset” key to select an

available preset.

For additional information, refer to “1 to 6

station memory operations” in this section

regarding preset memory options.

NOTE:

• Smart Favorites will start functioning

only after the audio unit is turned on for

a few minutes.

• Tune Start is supported for music chan-

nels only.

Replay Screen

The Replay Screen gives the user the ability

to replay, skip, pause or rewind the cur-

rently aired track.

When the “Replay” key is touched, the Re-

play Screen is prompted.

LHA3085 LHA3087

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REPLAY To replay a track from

the beginning, press

the key. The user

can continue to press

the key to replay

previous songs, but can

only go back as far as

the system permits. The

system will warn the

user when they cannot

skip any further back by

displaying “At the End” in

the bottom left corner

of the screen.

SKIP To skip a track, press

the key. “Live” will

appear in the bottom

left corner of the screen

indicating the difference

from play time to live

audio.

PAUSE To pause a track, press

the key.

REWIND/

FAST

FORWARD

To rewind/ fast forward

a track, hold the

or key.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

CD button

When the CD button is pressed with the

system off and the compact disc loaded,

the system will turn on and the compact

disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with a com-

pact disc loaded and the radio playing, the

radio will automatically be turned off and

the compact disc will start to play.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

CD/MP3 display mode

Menu item

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, certain text may be displayed (when a CD encoded with text is being

used). Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is encoded, the text is displayed listing the artist, album and

song title. There are other keys displayed on the screen when a CD is playing:

Random/Mix

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Random” or

alternates between Random Folder, and Random All. This text will appear on the display. To cancel Random/Mix

mode, touch the “Random” or “Mix” key until the key is no longer highlighted.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play pattern to the CD. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching “Repeat” alter-

nates between repeating the current song and repeating the current folder. This text will appear on the display. To

cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key until the key is no longer highlighted

Browse

Touch the “Browse” key to display the titles on the CD in list format. Touch the title of a song in the list to begin

playing that song. If an MP3 CD is playing, touching the “Browse” key will also list the folders on the disc. Follow the

procedure for selecting a song with the touch-screen to choose a folder.

SEEK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) buttons

Press and hold the or seek but-

tons for 1.5 seconds while the compact disc

is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The compact disc plays

at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is re-

leased, the compact disc returns to normal

play speed.

SEEK buttons

Press the seek button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press

the seek button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the seek button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one

track. Press the seek button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track on a CD is skipped, the first track

on the disc is played. If the last track in a

folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

AUX button

The AUX IN audio input port accepts any

standard analog audio input such as from

a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3

player or a laptop computer. Press the AUX

button to play a compatible device

plugged into the AUX IN port.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD EJECT button

When the CD EJECT button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will eject and the last source will be

played.

If the disc is not removed within 10 seconds,

the disc will reload.

Additional features

For additional information, refer to “iPod®

player operation with Navigation System”

in this section.

For additional information, refer to “USB

(Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port

(models with Navigation System)” in this

section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® streaming audio with Naviga-

tion System” in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT

(models without Navigation

System) (if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

LHA4319

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the instrument

panel. Insert the USB device into the instru-

ment panel.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to

switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is

playing or another audio source is plugged

in through the AUX IN jack, the MEDIA but-

ton toggles between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being

played can be displayed on the display

screen of the vehicle’s audio system. De-

pending on how the audio files are en-

coded, information such as Folder, Song

and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total

tracks in the folder are displayed on the

screen as well.

SEEK/CAT or TRACK

(Reverse or Fast

Forward) buttons

Press and hold the or

SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to reverse or fast forward the track

being played. The track plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the

audio file returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT or TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to return to the beginning of the

current track. Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK

button several times to skip back-

ward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT or TRACK button

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing to advance one track. Press the

SEEK/CAT or TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track in a folder on the USB device is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM (random) button is pressed

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will

be played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT (repeat) button is pressed

while an audio file on the USB device is

playing, the play pattern can be changed

as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files

on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER

or TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.

Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of

audio files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob in ei-

ther direction will return to the first track on

the USB device.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT

(models with Navigation System)

(if so equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

connection port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

LHA4319

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located on the instrument

panel. Insert the USB device into the instru-

ment panel.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

AUX (auxiliary) button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the AUX button to

switch to the USB input mode. If another

audio source is playing and a USB connec-

tion port device is inserted, press the AUX

button until the center display changes to

the USB memory mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

USB memory was playing, press the ON-

OFF button to restart the USB memory.

Play information

Information about the audio files being

played is shown on the display screen of

the vehicle’s audio system. Touch “Browse”

to display the list of folders and files on the

USB device. Touch the name of a song on

the screen to begin playing that song.

Seeking buttons

Press the seeking button while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to

return to the beginning of the current track.

Press the seeking button several

times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the seeking button while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to

advance one track. Press the seeking

button several times to skip forward sev-

eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the

USB device is skipped, the first track of the

next folder is played.

Random and repeat play mode

While files on a USB device are playing, the

play pattern can be altered so that songs

are repeated or played randomly.

Random

Touch the “Random” key to apply a random

play pattern to the USB device. When the Ran-

dom mode is active, the text “Random” on the

key will illuminate and the text “Random

Folder” appears. By touching the “Random”

key once more, the text “Random All” appears.

To cancel Random mode,touch the “Random”

key until no text is illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat play

pattern to the USB device. When the Repeat

mode is active, the text on the “Repeat” key will

illuminate and the text “Repeat Track” ap-

pears. By touching the “Repeat” key once

more, the text “Repeat Folder” appears. To

cancel Repeat mode, touch the “Repeat” key

until no text is illuminated.

LHA4006

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB port located on the instrument

panel. Connect the iPod®-specific end of

the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of

the cable to the USB port on the vehicle. If

your iPod® supports charging via a USB

connection, its battery will be charged

while connected to the vehicle with the ig-

nition switch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version

1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic (80GB) (firmware version

1.1.2PC or later)

∙ iPod® Classic (120GB) (firmware version

2.0.1PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3PC or later)

LHA4319

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.0.2PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (16GB)

(firmware version 1.0.1PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.2PC or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (8GB) (firm-

ware version 1.1PC or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 1st generation (firmware

version 2.2.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 2.2.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware

version 3.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware

version 4.3.5 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.1 or later)

∙

iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 4.3 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.0 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPad® (firmware version 4.3.2 or later)

∙ iPad® 2 (firmware version 4.3.3 or later)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch to the ACC or ON

position. Then, press the MEDIA button or

iPod MENU button repeatedly to switch to

the iPod® mode.

If the audio system is turned off while the

iPod® is playing, the iPod® plays when the

audio system is turned back on.

If the audio system is off, pressing the ME-

DIA button or iPod MENU button turns the

audio system on and plays the iPod®.

If the audio system is on, the audio system

automatically begins playing tracks from

the iPod® when it is plugged into the port.

iPod MENU button

Press the iPod MENU button while the

iPod® is connected to show the iPod® op-

eration menu on the audio display. Scroll

through the menu list using the

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob.

Press ENTER/SETTING button to select a

menu item. Items in the iPod® menu ap-

pear on the display in the following order:

∙ Now playing

∙ Playlists

∙ Artists

∙ Albums

∙ Songs

∙ Podcasts

∙ Genres

∙ Composers

∙ Audiobooks

∙ Shuffle songs

For additional information, refer to the

iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each

item.

SEEK/CAT or TRACK buttons

When the or SEEK/CAT or

TRACK button is pressed for less than

1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the

next track or the beginning of the current

track on the iPod® will be played.

When the or SEEK/CAT or

TRACK button is pressed for more than

1.5 seconds while the iPod® is playing, the

iPod® will play while fast forwarding or re-

winding. When the button is released, the

iPod® will return to the normal play speed.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are

repeated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is ap-

plied.

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle

→Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list

will be played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list

will be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is ap-

plied.

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous menu.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

LHA4319

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB port located on the instrument

panel. Connect the iPod®-specific end of

the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of

the cable to the USB port on the vehicle. If

your iPod® supports charging via a USB

connection, its battery will be charged

while connected to the vehicle with the ig-

nition switch in the ACC or ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB port on the vehicle, then remove the

cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware

version 2.0.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)*

∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware

version 1.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

* Some features of this iPod® may not be

fully functional.

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the AUX button repeatedly

to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod® was playing, pressing the ON·OFF

button will start the iPod®.

AUX button

When the AUX button is pressed with the

system off and the iPod® connected, the

system will turn on. If another audio source

is playing and the iPod® is connected, press

the AUX button repeatedly until the center

display changes to the iPod® mode.

Interface

The interface for iPod® operation shown on

the vehicle’s audio system display screen is

similar to the iPod® interface. Use the

touch-screen, BACK button or the scrolling

knob to navigate the menus on the screen.

When the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu”

key to bring up the iPod® interface.

Depending on the iPod® model, the follow-

ing items may be available on the menu list

screen. For additional information, refer to

the iPod® Owner’s Manual regarding each

menu item.

LHA4007 LHA2907

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

∙ Playlists

∙ Artists

∙ Albums

∙ Genres

∙ Songs

∙ Composers

∙ Audiobooks

∙ Podcasts

Shuffle and repeat play mode

While the iPod® is playing, the play pattern

can be altered so that songs are repeated

or played randomly.

Shuffle

Touch the “Shuffle” key to apply a random

play pattern to the iPod®. When the Shuffle

mode is active, the text is illuminated and

will display “Shuffle songs” text above the

“Shuffle” key. To cancel Shuffle mode, touch

the “Shuffle” key again until the text is no

longer illuminated.

Repeat

Touch the “Repeat” key to apply a repeat

play pattern to the iPod®. When the repeat

mode is active, the text is illuminated and

will display “Repeat song” text above the

“Repeat” key. To cancel Repeat mode, touch

the “Repeat” key again until the text is no

longer illuminated.

SEEK buttons

Press the SEEK button or to

skip backward or forward one track.

Press and hold the SEEK button

or for 1.5 seconds while a track is

playing to reverse or fast forward the track

being played. The track plays at an in-

creased speed while reversing or fast for-

warding. When the button is released, the

track returns to normal play speed.

Scrolling menus

While navigating long lists of artists, al-

bums or songs in the music menu, it is

possible to scroll the list by the first charac-

ter in the name. To activate character in-

dexing, touch and hold the “A-Z” key in the

upper right corner of the screen. Turn the

TUNE knob to choose the number or letter

to jump to in the list and then press the

ENTER/AUDIO button.

If no character is selected after a few sec-

onds, the display returns to normal.

LHA2279

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Select the “Add Phone or Device” key.

This same screen can be accessed to

remove, replace or select a different

Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset. The con-

necting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are

displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3

button for play and the Preset 4 button for

pause.

LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers.

Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset.

NOTE:

The connecting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

LHA2773 LHA2844

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the AUX button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are

displayed on the screen.

CD CARE AND CLEANING

∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend

the disc. Never touch the surface of the

disc.

∙ Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

∙ Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges by rubbing the inner and outer

edges with the side of a pen or pencil as

illustrated.

LHA0049

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

The audio system can be operated using

the controls on the steering wheel.

1. Volume control switch

2. MODE select switch

3. Tuning switch

MODE select switch

Push the MODE select switch to change

the mode in the following sequence:

AM →P1→FM1 →FM2→P2→(SXM1 →SXM2

→SXM3 (satellite radio, if so equipped)) →

CD* →USB/iPod®* (if so equipped) →

Bluetooth® Audio* →AUX* →AM→P1.

* These modes are only available when

compatible media storage is inserted into

the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase

or decrease the volume.

Tuning switch

While the display is showing a map or audio

screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or

downward to select a station, track, CD or

folder. For most audio sources, tilting the

switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

provides a different function than a tilting

up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to seek up or down to the next station.

XM (if so equipped)

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to go to the next or previous channel.

SXM (if so equipped)

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to go to the next or previous channel.

iPod®

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to increase or decrease the folder num-

ber (if playing compressed audio files).

LHA2559

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to increase or decrease the folder num-

ber.

Bluetooth® Audio

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to reverse or fast forward the current

song.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can

be removed. When you need to remove the

antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-

clockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna

rod clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

∙ Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle

operation.

∙ Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an auto-

matic car wash.

This vehicle is equipped with Smartphone

Integration technology. This allows many

compatible Smartphone applications to

be displayed and easily controlled through

the vehicle’s touch-screen.

NOTE:

A compatible smartphone and registra-

tion is required to use mobile applica-

tions or to access connected features of

certain vehicle applications.

REGISTERING WITH

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS

To use the Smartphone Integration feature,

it is necessary for the user to register. In

order to register, visit the NissanConnect®

Mobile Apps website,

www.nissanusa.com/connect/ or

www.nissan.ca/en/connect or

www.nissan.ca/fr/connect and sign up or

create an account through the prompts on

the NissanConnect® Mobile Apps. Once

registered, download the NissanConnect®

Mobile Apps from your compatible phone’s

application download source and then log

into the application. If you already have an

account created through the App, please

NISSANCONNECT® MOBILE APPS

(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

CONNECT PHONE

To use this feature, a compatible smart-

phone must be connected via Bluetooth®

or USB to the vehicle. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System with Navigation System” in

this section.

NOTE:

Apple iPhones® REQUIRE the phone to be

plugged in via USB for NissanConnect®

Mobile Apps to function.

For Android phones, NissanConnect®

Mobile Apps REQUIRES the phone to be

paired via Bluetooth®.

APPLICATION DOWNLOAD

Once connected, the NissanConnect® App

will search your phone to determine which

compatible applications are currently in-

stalled. The user will then choose which

apps they want to bring into their vehicle

from the list of apps within the “Manage My

Apps” section of the NissanConnect® App

on their smartphone. The vehicle will then

download the in-vehicle interface for each

of these compatible applications. Once

downloaded, the user can access their se-

lected smartphone applications through

the vehicle touch-screen.

For additional information, refer to

www.nissanusa.com/connect or

www.nissan.ca/en/connect or

www.nissan.ca/fr/connect regarding

application availability.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes

Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free

mode to reduce user distraction. In this

mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-

tion by voice control. After connecting a

compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated

from the TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps,

may not be available while driving.

∙ For getting best results, always update

your device to the latest software ver-

sion.

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate the surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which

may prevent the system from recogniz-

ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ For functions that can be used in Siri

Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple

website.

SIRI® EYES FREE

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or

later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S

are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-

tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-

tails about device compatibility.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please

check phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please

check phone settings.

For best results, always update your device

to the latest software version.

SIRI® ACTIVATION

Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by

pushing TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Models with navigation system

1. Connect an Siri Eyes Free enabled

iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Connecting pro-

cedure” in this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-

tablished, push and hold the

TALK switch to activate the Siri Eyes

Free function.

Models without navigation system

1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled

iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Initialization” in

this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-

tablished, the switch operation select

screen is displayed.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for

Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action

can also be changed from the

Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

Siri® Eyes Free Settings (models with-

out navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen

to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the

TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the

end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to

extend the session.

LHA2589

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,

etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change

to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*

when the music starts playing. Mode

selection is determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the

USB cable.

If the audio track does not start playing

automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try

changing the track or audio source to re-

sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music

app. Performance of music control func-

tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or

other 3rd party music apps may vary and

is controlled by the iPhone®.

Example2–Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected

and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®

settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-

play a notification for new incoming

text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or

push and hold the TALK switch to

reply using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-

sage” or a similar command to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS (models without

navigation system)

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in

the Bluetooth settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-

tings” in this section.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Use the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button.

Use the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL

knob to select “Siri” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” us-

ing the TUNE/SCROLL knob and then

press the ENTER/SETTING button.

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS (models with

navigation system)

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in

the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-

tings” in this section.

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone settings” key.

5. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” to

set the activation.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes Free

from switch on the steering

wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.

Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.

Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Models without navigation system:

Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and

hold the TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”,

a short push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.

Audio Source does not change

automatically to iPod® or

Bluetooth®

Audio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd

party music apps may vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade

performance.

Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the MODE select switch on

the steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track, previous

track or play timer does not

work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd

party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

Cannot hear any music/audio

being played back from a con-

nected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot hear map

turn-by-turn direction guidance

from a

connected iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot receive text

message notifications on the

vehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My

Car”. Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text message

notifications

by Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the TALK switch on the

steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode (if so

equipped) is highly recommended.

Exercise extreme caution at all times

so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage

control system and the vehicle bat-

tery may not charge completely. For

additional information, refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

LHA3143

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the previously connected cellu-

lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® de-

vices. If your phone does not connect au-

tomatic ally to the system, consult the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on

device operation.

You can connect up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a compatible cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module before us-

ing the hands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized or work

properly. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting in-

structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the cellu-

lar phone may discharge quicker than

usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

∙ For additional information, you can visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-

ing the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSANVoice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“Hands-free phone system not ready” and

will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe

the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,

vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-

vent the system from recognizing voice

commands correctly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press and release the button located

on the steering wheel. After the tone

sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ If you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat them.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Command not

recognized. Please try again.” Make sure

the command is said exactly as

prompted by the system and repeat

the command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is

waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-

nounces “Cancel” and ends the NISSAN

Voice Recognition session. You can also

press and hold the button on the

steering wheel for 5 seconds at any

time to end the NISSAN Voice Recogni-

tion session. Whenever the NISSAN

Voice Recognition session is cancelled,

a double beep is played to indicate you

have exited the system.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, press the Volume con-

trol switches (+ or -) on the steering

wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the radio volume

control knob.

∙ In most cases you can interrupt the

voice feedback to speak the next com-

mand by pressing the button on

the steering wheel.

∙ To use the system faster, you may

speak the second level commands with

the main menu command on the main

menu. For example, press the but-

ton and after the tone say, “Call Redial.”

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

LHA2561

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to

initiate a Voice Recognition

session or answer an

incoming call.

If the operation of “Siri” is

set to “Short Press” on the

Bluetooth® setting menu,

pressing and holding

the button initiates a

Voice Recognition session

for the Hands-Free Phone

operation. For additional

information, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings”

in this section.

You can also use the

button to interrupt the

system feedback and give a

command at once. For

additional information, refer

to “Voice Commands” and

“During a call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition

system is active, press and

hold the button for

5 seconds to quit the voice

recognition system at any

time.

Tuning switch

While using the voice

recognition system, tilt the

tuning switch up or down

to manually control the

phone system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Use the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result

Bluetooth ON/OFF Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect device.

On Turns Bluetooth® functionality on

Off Turns Bluetooth® functionality off

Add Phone Upon pressing this button, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. operate the Bluetooth® phone to enter the PIN and

complete the connection process.

Delete Phone Delete a phone currently connected to the system.

Replace Phone Replace the phone currently connected to the system. This option allows the user to keep any voice tags that were recorded

using the previous phone if vehicle is equipped with voice recognition.

Select Phone Choose a phone from a list of previously connected or currently connected phones.

The connecting procedure varies according to each phone. For additional information, refer to your cellular phone’s Owner’s Manual.

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press the button and say “Phone” to

bring up the phone command menu. The

available options are:

∙ Call

∙ Phonebook

∙ Recent Calls

∙ Messaging (if so equipped)

∙ Show Applications (if so equipped)

∙ Select Phone

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available un-

der “Phonebook”:

∙ (A Name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring

up a list of options for that phonebook

entry. The system will say the name it

interpreted based on the voice com-

mand provided. If the name is incorrect,

say “Correction” to hear another name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is

identified, say “Dial” to dial the number

or “Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the phonebook entry.

Say “Delete Recording” to delete a re-

corded name for the phonebook entry.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

∙ List Names

Speak this command to have the sys-

tem list the names in the phonebook

one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to

dial the number of the current name or

“Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previ-

ous Entry” to move through the list al-

phabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phone-

book entry.

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available un-

der “Recent Calls”:

∙ Incoming

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the incoming call will

be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of in-

coming calls.

∙ Missed

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the missed call will be

displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of

missed calls.

∙ Outgoing

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the

call was to an entry in the phonebook,

the name will be displayed. Otherwise,

the phone number of the outgoing call

will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of out-

going calls.

∙ Redial

Speak this command to call the last

number dialed.

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the num-

ber of the last incoming call to the ve-

hicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text mes-

saging functions. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-

tion.

“Show Applications” (if so

equipped)

Speak this command to display list of

smartphone apps available.

NOTE:

Compatible smartphone and registra-

tion necessary to access applications.

“Select Phone”

Speak this command to select a phone to

use from a list of those phones connected

to the vehicle.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to

the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. The system will prompt you for a com-

mand. Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice com-

mands to continue:

∙ “(A Name)” — Speak the name of a

phonebook entry to place a call to that

entry. The system will respond with the

name it interpreted from your com-

mand and will prompt you to confirm

that the name is correct. Say “Dial” to

initiate the call or “Correction” to hear

another name from the phonebook.

∙ “Phone Number” — Speak this com-

mand to place a call by inputting num-

bers. For 7– to 10–digit phone number,

speak the numbers. Say “Correction” at

any time in the process to correct a

misspoken or misinterpreted number.

For phone numbers with more digits or

special characters, say “Special Num-

ber”, then speak the digits. Up to 24 dig-

its can be entered. Available special

characters are “start”, “pound”, “plus”,

and “pause”. When finished, say “Dial” to

initiate the call. Say “Correction” at any

time in the process to correct a misspo-

ken or misinterpreted number or char-

acter.

∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last outgoing call.

The system will display “Re-dialing

<name/number>”. The name of the

phonebook entry will be displayed if it

available, otherwise the number being

re-dialed will be displayed.

∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to

dial the number of the last incoming

call. The system will display “Calling

back <name/number>”. The name of

the phonebook entry will be displayed if

it available, otherwise the number be-

ing called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone con-

nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, the call information is

displayed on the control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button

to access additional options. Speak one of

the following commands:

∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed

by the digits to enter digits during the

phone call.

∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the

command to mute or unmute the sys-

tem.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To

transfer the call back from the handset

to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, press the button and

confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call

waiting functionality. If a call is received

while another call is already active, a mes-

sage will be displayed on the screen. Press

the button to hold the active call and

switch to the second call. Press the

button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same com-

mands that are available during any call as

well as two additional commands:

∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to

hold the second call and switch back to

the original call.

∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command

to stay with the second call and end the

original call.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the but-

ton.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before using

this feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if

the connected device does not support

the Message Access Profile (MAP). For

additional information, refer to the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and

instructions.

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth® menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. For additional

information, refer to your phone’s Own-

er’s manual. Text message integration

requires that the phone support MAP

(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-

ing and sending text messages. Some

phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. For additional informa-

tion, please refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-

ibility information, as well as your de-

vice’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ To (a name)

∙ Enter Number

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these

options, refer to “Voice commands” in

this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Nine predefined messages are avail-

able as well as three custom mes-

sages. To choose one of the predefined

messages, speak one of the following

after the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

∙ “Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages,

say “Custom Messages”. If more than

one custom message is stored, the sys-

tem will prompt for the number of the

desired custom message.For additional

information on setting and managing

custom text messages, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery

time are shown on the screen. Use the tun-

ing switch to scroll through all text mes-

sages if more than one are available. Press

the button to exit the text message

screen. Press the button to access

the following options for replying to the text

message:

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender

of the text message using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Send Text

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

∙ Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

∙ Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

∙ Next Text

Speak this command to move to the

next text message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,

it can also be used to create custom mes-

sages that are sent through the phone. For

additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes

Free” in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can

only be sent through Siri.

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Use the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL

knob to select “Bluetooth” and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button:

∙ Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

∙ Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to

“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the dis-

played list. The system will ask to con-

firm before deleting the phone.

∙ Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the dis-

played list. When a selection is made,

the system will ask to confirm before

proceeding. The recorded phonebook

for the phone being deleted will be

saved as long as the new phone’s

phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

∙ Select Phone

Select to connect to a previously con-

nected phone from the displayed list.

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ Show Incoming Calls

Incoming call information may be dis-

played on the center display screen.

∙ Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic

download of a connected phone’s

phonebook.

∙ Text Message (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

∙ New Text Sound (if so equipped)

Select to adjust the volume of the

sound that plays when a new text is

received by a phone connected to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The setting all the way to the left indi-

cates that the new text sound will be

muted.

∙ Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)

Incoming text messages may be dis-

played on the center display screen. Se-

lect “None” to have no display of incom-

ing text messages.

∙ Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)

Select to set a custom message that

will be available with the standard op-

tions when sending a text message. To

set a custom message, send a text

message to your own phone number

while the phone is connected to the

system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be

set while the vehicle is stationary.

∙ Auto Reply (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply

function. When enabled, the vehicle will

automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text

message is received while driving.

∙ Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)

Select to choose the message that is

sent when the Auto Reply function is

enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or

one of the three custom messages

stored in the system.

∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so

equipped)

Select to choose whether or not the

vehicle signature is added to outgoing

text messages from the vehicle. This

message cannot be changed or cus-

tomized.

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system,

it is possible to select menu options by

using the steering wheel controls instead

of speaking voice commands. To activate

manual control mode, press the but-

ton on the steering wheel to access the

phone menu and then push either up or

down on the tuning switch .

The manual control mode does not allow

dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook

or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice

Recognition, exit the manual control mode

by pressing and holding the button.

At that time, pressing the button will

start the Hands Free Phone System.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

LHA3144

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(if so equipped)

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the connected cellular phone

turned on and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

NISSAN Voice Recognition system sup-

ports the phone commands, so dialing a

phone number using your voice is possible.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Voice Recognition System” in this section.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a cellular phone and the in-

vehicle phone module before using the

hands-free phone system.

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized by the

in-vehicle phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting in-

structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Immediately after the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position, it may be im-

possible to receive a call for a short pe-

riod of time.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙ While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the cellu-

lar phone may discharge quicker than

usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System cannot charge cellular

phones.

∙ If the hands-free phone system seems

to be malfunctioning, refer to “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/

bluetooth or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth

for troubleshooting help.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ Refer to the cellular phone owner’s

manual regarding the telephone

charges, cellular phone antenna and

body, etc.

∙ The signal strength display on the

monitor will not coincide with the signal

strength display of some cellular

phones.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Bosch.

VOICE COMMANDS

You can use voice commands to operate

various Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem features using the NISSAN Voice Rec-

ognition system. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” in this section.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

While using the Voice Recognition system,

the system voice can be interrupted to al-

low the user to speak commands. While

the system is speaking, press the

button on the steering wheel. The system

voice will stop and a tone will be heard.

After the tone, speak desired command

(displayed on the touch-screen).

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be canceled.

1. Press the [ ] button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Connect New Device” key.

5. Initiate the connecting process from

the handset. The system will display

the message: “Confirm on your

Bluetooth device that the PIN XXXXXX is

displayed”. If the PIN is displayed on

your Bluetooth® device, select “Pair” to

complete the pairing process.

For additional information, refer to the

Bluetooth® device’s Owner’s Manual.

VEHICLE PHONEBOOK

To access the vehicle phonebook:

1. Press the button on the control

panel.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key.

3. Choose the desired entry from the dis-

played list.

4. The number of the entry will be dis-

played on the screen. Touch the num-

ber to initiate dialing.

NOTE:

To scroll quickly through the list, touch

the “A-Z” key in the upper right corner of

the screen. Turn the TUNE knob to

choose a letter or number and then

press the ENTER/AUDIO button. The list

will move to the first entry that begins

with that number or letter.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the button on the control

panel. The “Phone” screen will appear

on the display.

2. Select one of the following options to

make a call:

∙ “Phonebook”: Select the name from an

entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.

∙ “Call Lists”: Select the name from the

incoming, outgoing or missed.

∙ “Redial”: Dial the last outgoing call from

the vehicle.

LHA2773

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

∙“ ”: Input the phone number manu-

ally using a keypad displayed on the

screen. For additional information, refer

to “How to use the touch-screen” in this

section.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is placed to the connected

phone, the display will change to phone

mode.

To accept the incoming call, either:

∙ Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

∙ Touch the icon on the screen.

To reject the incoming call, either:

∙ Press the button on the steering

wheel, or

∙ Touch the icon on the screen.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, the following options

are available on the screen:

∙ “Handset”

Select this option to switch control of

the phone call over to the handset.

∙ “Mute Mic.”

Select this option to mute the micro-

phone. Select again to unmute the mi-

crophone.

∙ Phone icon

Select to end the phone call.

ENDING A CALL

To end a phone call, select the phone

icon on the screen or press the but-

ton on the steering wheel.

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before using

this feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

NOTE:

This feature is automatically disabled if

the connected device does not support

the Message Access Profile (MAP). For

additional information, refer to the

phone’s Owner’s Manual for details and

instructions.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth® menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. For additional

information, refer to your phone’s Own-

er’s manual. Text message integration

requires that the phone support MAP

(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-

ing and sending text messages. Some

phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. For additional informa-

tion, please refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-

ibility information, as well as your de-

vice’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ To (a name)

∙ Enter Number

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these

options, refer to “Voice commands” in

this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Nine predefined messages are avail-

able as well as three custom mes-

sages. To choose one of the predefined

messages, speak one of the following

after the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

∙ “Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages,

say “Custom Messages”. If more than

one custom message is stored, the

system will prompt for the number of

the desired custom message. For ad-

ditional information on setting and

managing custom text messages, re-

fer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this sec-

tion.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

The text message, sender and delivery

time are shown on the screen. Use

the buttons to scroll through all

text messages if more than one are avail-

able. Press the button to exit the text

message screen. Press the button to

access the following options for replying to

the text message:

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender

of the text message using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Send Text

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

∙ Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

∙ Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

∙ Next Text

Speak this command to move to the

next text message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,

it can also be used to create custom mes-

sages that are sent through the phone. For

additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes

Free” in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones®, text messages can

only be sent through Siri. BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

LHA2844

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Menu Item Result

Phone Settings For additional information, refer to “Phone settings” in this section.

Connect New Device Select to connect a new Bluetooth® device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Select Connected Device Select to choose a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Replace Connected Device Select to replace a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Delete Connected Device Select to delete a Bluetooth® device from a list of those devices connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Bluetooth Select to toggle Bluetooth® on and off.

PHONE SETTINGS

To access the phone settings:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Settings” key.

3. Touch the “Phone & Bluetooth” key.

4. Touch the “Phone Settings” key and ad-

just the following settings as desired:

∙ Start Siri® by:

Touch “Short Press” or “Long Press” to

set how Siri® is operated on the steering

wheel.

∙ Sort Phonebook By:

Touch “First Name” or “Last Name” to

choose how phonebook entries are al-

phabetically displayed on the screen.

∙ Use Phonebook From:

Touch “Handset” to use the phone’s

phonebook. Touch “SIM” to use the

phonebook on the SIM card. Select

“Both” to use both sources.

∙ Download Phonebook Now:

Touch to download the phonebook to

the vehicle from the chosen source.

∙ Record Name for Phonebook Entry:

Touch to record a name for a phone-

book entry for use with the NISSAN

Voice Recognition System.

∙ Phone Notifications for:

Notifications may be displayed on the

center display screen.

∙ Text Messaging (if so equipped):

Touch to toggle the text message func-

tionality on or off.

∙ Show Incoming Text for:

Text notifications may be displayed on

the center display screen. Touch “Off” to

turn off all text notifications.

∙ Auto Reply:

Touch to toggle the auto reply function-

ality on or off.

∙ Auto Reply Message:

Touch to indicate preferred message to

be sent when “Auto Reply” function is

activated.

∙ Use Vehicle’s Signature:

Touch to toggle on or off the addition of the

vehicle signature to outgoing messages.

∙ Custom Text Messages:

Touch this option to select a custom

message to edit. There are 4 customer

message slots available.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, try the following so-

lutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. For additional information, refer to “NISSAN Voice Recognition

System” in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in

the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on).

NOTE: If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from

the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle phonebook” in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

3. Please speak both first and last name of contact to improve recognition accuracy.

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The NISSAN Voice Recognition System al-

lows hands-free operation of the systems

equipped on this vehicle, such as the

phone and navigation systems.

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press the button located on the

steering wheel. When prompted, speak the

command for the system you wish to acti-

vate. The command given is picked up by

the microphone and performed when it is

properly recognized. NISSAN Voice Recog-

nition will provide a voice response as well

as a message in the center display to in-

form you of the command results.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,

which takes a few seconds. When com-

pleted, the system is ready to accept voice

commands. If the button is pressed

before the initialization completes, the sys-

tem will announce: “Voice Recognition Sys-

tem not ready. Please wait.”

Giving voice commands

1. Press the button.

2. The system announces: “Please say a

category like phone or a command like

points of interest followed by a brand

name”. A list of available commands is

then spoken by the system.

3. After the tone sounds and the face icon

on the display changes, speak a com-

mand. Available commands are dis-

cussed in this section.

4. Voice and display feedback are pro-

vided when the command is accepted.

∙ If the command is not recognized, the

system announces: “Command not

recognized”. Repeat the command in a

clear voice.

∙ If you want to cancel the command or

go back to the previous menu of com-

mands, press the button. The sys-

tem will announce: “Canceling Voice

Recognition” or “Go back” depending on

the current menu level.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, use the volume control

switches on the steering wheel or the

volume knob on the control panel.

∙ The voice command screen can also be

accessed using the control panel dis-

play:

1. Press the [ ] button.

2. Touch the “Voice Commands” key.

LHA2589

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of NISSAN

Voice Recognition, observe the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate the surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which

may prevent the system from recogniz-

ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ Wait until a tone sounds before speak-

ing a command. Otherwise, the com-

mand will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

3.5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

SYSTEM FEATURES

NISSAN Voice Recognition can activate the

following systems:

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

∙ Navigation

∙ Audio

∙ Information

∙ My Apps

∙ Help

For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a cer-

tain way to speak numbers in voice com-

mands. Refer to the following examples.

General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” can be

used for “0”.

Phone numbers

Speak phone numbers according to the

following example. For 1-800-662-6200, say

dial number and then speak the phone

number in any of the following formats:

∙ “one eight oh oh six six two six two oh

oh”

∙ “one eight hundred six six two six two oh

oh”

∙ “one eight zero zero six six two six two

oh oh”

For the best voice recognition phone dial-

ing results, say phone numbers as single

digits. Also, full numbers can only be spo-

ken for “800”. For example, you cannot say

555-6000 as “five five five six thousand”.

LHA4373

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE

PHONE SYSTEM VOICE

COMMANDS

To access the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Call” and then a name in the ve-

hicle phonebook to call that entry. Oth-

erwise, say “Phone” to access various

phone commands.

If the Bluetooth® has been set to “Off”, the

system announces: “Bluetooth® is off.

Would you like to turn Bluetooth® on?”

If no phone is connected to the system and

the vehicle is stationary, the system an-

nounces: “There is no phone connected.

Would you like to connect a phone now?”

Say “Yes” to connect a phone. All further

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

voice commands are only available if a

phone is connected.

If a phone is connected and Bluetooth® is

set to “On”, the following voice commands

are available:

∙ Call (a name)

Speak the name of the contact in

which you are trying to call. System will

confirm correct contact. Say “Dial” to

initiate dialing.

∙ Dial Number

Allows for up to 24 digits to be dialed.

After the number is entered, say “Dial”

to initiate dialing. Say “Correction” to

correct the number entered. Say “Go

Back” to return to the main menu.

∙ List Phonebook

Starting with the first alphabetical en-

try in the vehicle phonebook, the sys-

tem prompts for an additional com-

mand. Say “Dial” to call the number of

the phonebook entry. Say “Send Text”

to send a text message to the number

of the phonebook entry. Say “Next En-

try” to skip to the next alphabetical en-

try in the vehicle phonebook, where

the same options will then be available.

∙ Recent Calls

The system prompts for an additional

command. Say “Missed Calls”, “Incom-

ing Calls” or “Outgoing Calls” to display

a list of such calls on the screen.

Speak the number of the entry dis-

played on the screen to dial that num-

ber or say “Next Page” to view entries

on the next page (if available).

∙ Redial

Redials the last called number.

∙ Read Text

Reads an incoming text message.

∙ Send Text

Sends a text message.

∙ Select Phone

The system replies “Please use manual

controls to continue”. Use manual con-

trols to change the active phone from

among the listed phones connected

to the vehicle.

∙ Siri (if so equipped)

The system replies “starting Siri”. For

additional information, refer to “Oper-

ating Siri® Eyes Free” in this section.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

with Navigation System” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are avail-

able for the navigation system:

∙ Street Address (address)

∙ Points of Interest (name)

∙ POI by Category

∙ Home

∙ Address Book

∙ Previous Destinations

∙ Enter Address in Steps

∙ Cancel Route

For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

AUDIO SYSTEM VOICE COMMANDS

To access the audio system voice commands:

1. Press the button.

2. Say “Audio”

3. Speak a command from the following

available commands:

∙ Play (AM, FM, etc.)

Allows user to select radio band

∙ Tune AM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

AM frequency

∙ Tune FM (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

FM frequency

∙ SXM channel (number)

Allows user to tune directly to a desired

SXM station (if so equipped)

∙ CD Track (number)

Allows user to select track to be played

∙ Play Song (name)

Allows user to select song name to be

played

∙ Play Artist (name)

Allows user to select artist to be played

∙ Play Album (name)

Allows user to select album name to

be played

For additional information, refer to “Audio

system” in this section.

INFORMATION VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands are avail-

able for the information functions of the

navigation system:

∙ Traffic

∙ Fuel Prices

∙ Stocks

∙ Movie Listings

∙ Current Weather

∙ Weather Map

∙ 5—dayForecast

∙ 6 — hour Forecast

For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

MY APPS VOICE COMMANDS

Many Apps can be accessed using this

voice command. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “NissanConnect® Mobile Apps”

in this section.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

HELP VOICE COMMANDS

The following voice commands can be

spoken to have the system provide in-

structions and tips for using the NISSAN

Voice Recognition System.

∙ List Commands

∙ What Can I Say?

∙ General Help

∙ Go Back

∙ Quit

∙ Exit

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all

voice commands without difficulty. If prob-

lems are encountered, follow the solutions

given in this guide for the appropriate error.

Where the solutions are listed by number,

try each solution in turn, starting with num-

ber one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message Solution

The system responds “Command

Not Recognized” or the system fails

to recognize the command

correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid. Use the “List Commands” or “What Can I Say?” command under the “Help”

menu.

2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.

3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, with the windows open or the defroster on).

NOTE:

If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.

4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2

Three-way catalyst ...........................5-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................................5-6

Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-6

Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7

Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-8

Driving safety precautions ....................5-8

Ignition switch..................................5-10

Automatic transmission

(if so equipped) ...............................5-11

Manual transmission (M/T)

(if so equipped) ..............................5-12

Key positions ................................5-12

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

(if so equipped) ..............................5-12

Before starting the engine......................5-13

Starting the engine .............................5-13

Driving the vehicle ..............................5-14

Automatic transmission (A/T)

(if so equipped) ..............................5-14

Manual transmission (if so equipped) ........5-18

Parking brake ..................................5-21

Cruise control ..................................5-22

Precautions on cruise control................5-22

Cruise control operations....................5-22

Break-in schedule ..............................5-24

Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-24

Increasing fuel economy .......................5-25

Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)

(if so equipped) .................................5-26

Transfer case shifting procedures ...........5-26

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system (if so equipped) .........................5-33

Parking/parking on hills ........................5-34

Power steering .................................5-35

Brake system...................................5-35

Brake precautions ...........................5-35

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-36

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS) system.........5-37

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-38

Brake force distribution......................5-40

Hill descent control system (if so equipped).....5-41

Hill start assist system (if so equipped) .........5-42

Rear Sonar System (RSS) (if so equipped) .......5-42

Cold weather driving ...........................5-43

Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-43

Antifreeze ...................................5-43

Battery......................................5-43

Draining of coolant water....................5-44

Tire equipment ..............................5-44

Special winter equipment ...................5-44

Driving on snow or ice .......................5-44

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-45

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise ex-

haust gases could be drawn into the

passenger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the liftgate or the

body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

∙ If a special body, camper, or other

equipment is added for recreational

or other usage, follow the manufac-

turer’s recommendation to prevent

carbon monoxide entry into the ve-

hicle. Do not occupy these areas while

the engine is running even if the ve-

hicle is parked. Some recreational ve-

hicle appliances such as stoves, re-

frigerators, heaters, etc. may also

generate carbon monoxide.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible, and inflate them to the proper pres-

sure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

Starting and driving 5-3

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately

1 minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure of your tires are adjusted. After

the tires are inflated to the recom-

mended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn

off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warn-

ing message is displayed in the odom-

eter when the low tire pressure warning

light is illuminated and low tire pressure

is detected. The CHECK TIRE PRES warn-

ing message turns off when the low tire

pressure warning light turns off. The low

tire pressure warning light remains illu-

minated until the tires are inflated to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. The

CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is

displayed each time the ignition switch

is placed in the ON position as long as

the low tire pressure warning light re-

mains illuminated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Check tire pressure

warning message” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning is not

displayed if the low tire pressure warn-

ing light illuminates to indicate a TPMS

malfunction.

∙ The CHECK TIRE PRES warning appears

each time the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position as long as the low tire

pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section and “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual

for changing a flat tire.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, the TPMS will not function

and the low tire pressure warning

light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception of

the signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-5

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly

higher rollover rate than other types of

vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than

passenger cars to make them capable of

performing in a variety of on-pavement

and off-road applications. This gives them

a higher center of gravity than ordinary ve-

hicles. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allow-

ing you to anticipate problems. However,

they are not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as conventional 2-wheel

drive vehicles any more than low-slung

sports cars are designed to perform satis-

factorily under off-road conditions. If at all

possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may result in

loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a roll-

over crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving

safety precautions” in this section.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

5-6 Starting and driving

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide.The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires re-

turn to the road surface. When all tires

are on the road surface, steer the ve-

hicle to stay in the appropriate driving

lane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

Starting and driving 5-7

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS

AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others.Additionally, if you are

injured in an accident, alcohol can in-

crease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under

the influence of alcohol. Every year thou-

sands of people are injured or killed in

alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo-

cal laws vary on what is considered to be

legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most

people underestimate the effects of alco-

hol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal

and off-road use. However, avoid driving in

deep water or mud as your NISSAN is

mainly designed for leisure use, unlike a

conventional off-road vehicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are

less capable than 4-wheel drive models for

rough road driving and extrication when

stuck in deep snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

5-8 Starting and driving

∙ Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or

straight down the slopes.Off-road ve-

hicles can tip over sideways much

more easily than they can forward or

backward.

∙ Many hills are too steep for any ve-

hicle. If you drive up them, you may

stall. If you drive down them, you may

not be able to control your speed. If

you drive across them, you may roll

over.

∙ Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

∙ Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-

off or other hazard that could cause

an accident.

∙

If your engine stalls or you cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill, never

attempt to turn around. Your vehicle

could tip or roll over. Always back

straight down in R (Reverse) gear. Never

back down in N (Neutral) or with the

clutch depressed (manual transmis-

sion vehicles), using only the brake, as

this could cause loss of control.

∙ Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and

fade, resulting in loss of control and

an accident. Apply brakes lightly and

use a low gear to control your speed.

Use the hill descent control feature (if

so equipped).

∙ Unsecured cargo can be thrown

around when driving over rough ter-

rain. Properly secure all cargo so it will

not be thrown forward and cause in-

jury to you or your passengers.

∙ To avoid raising the center of gravity

excessively, do not exceed the rated

capacity of the roof rack (if so

equipped) and evenly distribute the

load. Secure heavy loads in the cargo

area as far forward and as low as pos-

sible. Do not equip the vehicle with

tires larger than specified in this

manual. This could cause your vehicle

to roll over.

∙ Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

∙ Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers

have their seat belts fastened.

∙ Always drive with the floor mats in

place as the floor may become hot.

∙ Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher cen-

ter of gravity, your NISSAN is more af-

fected by strong side winds. Slower

speeds ensure better vehicle control.

∙ Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged (if so equipped).

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Starting and driving 5-9

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing), or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

∙ If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high

speeds. Your NISSAN 4-wheel drive

vehicle has a higher center of gravity

than a passenger car. The vehicle is

not designed for cornering at the

same speeds as passenger cars. Fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly

could result in loss of control and/or a

rollover accident.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction (bias, bias-

belted, or radial), and tread pattern on

all four wheels. Install tire chains on

the rear wheels when driving on slip-

pery roads and drive carefully.

∙ Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Wet

brakes” in this section.

∙ Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

∙ Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent mainte-

nance may be required. For additional

information, refer to “Maintenance

under severe operating conditions” in

the “Maintenance and schedules” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the ignition key or place

the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion while driving. The steering wheel

will lock (for models with a steering

lock mechanism). This may cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle

and could result in serious vehicle

damage or personal injury.

IGNITION SWITCH

5-10 Starting and driving

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

(if so equipped)

The ignition lock is designed so the ignition

switch cannot be placed in the LOCK posi-

tion and the key removed until the shift

lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When removing the key from the ignition,

make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park)

position.

If the shift lever is not returned to P (Park)

position, the ignition switch cannot be

placed in the LOCK position.

To remove the key from the ignition switch:

1. Shift the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion with the ignition switch in the ON

position.

2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

3. Remove the key from the ignition.

If the shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)

position after the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position or when the ignition

switch cannot be turned to the LOCK posi-

tion, proceed as follows to remove the key.

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

2. Turn the ignition key slightly toward the

ON position.

3. Turn the key to the LOCK position.

4. Remove the key.

The shift lever is designed so it cannot be

moved out of P (Park) and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition key is

placed in the OFF position or if the key is

removed from the switch.

The shift lever can be moved if the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position and the

foot brake pedal is depressed.

There is an OFF position between the

LOCK and ON positions. The OFF position

is indicated by a “1” on the ignition

switch. When the ignition is in the OFF

position, the steering wheel is not locked

(for models with a steering lock mecha-

nism).

In order for the steering wheel to be locked,

it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock-

wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the key

to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To

unlock the steering wheel, insert the key

and turn it gently while rotating the

steering wheel slightly right and left.

If the key will not turn from the LOCK

position, turn the steering wheel to the

left or right while turning the key to un-

lock the key cylinder.

WSD0041

Starting and driving 5-11

MANUAL TRANSMISSION (M/T)

(if so equipped)

The ignition switch includes a device that

helps prevent accidental removal of the

key while driving.

The key can only be removed when the

ignition switch is in the LOCK position.

On M/T models, to turn the ignition switch

to the LOCK position from the ACC or ON

position, place the ignition switch in the

OFF position, push the key in, then place the

ignition switch in the LOCK position.

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK: Normal parking position (0)

OFF: (Not used) (1)

ACC: (Accessories) (2)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries such as the radio when the engine is

not running.

ON: Normal operating position (3)

This position turns on the ignition system

and the electrical accessories.

START: (4)

This position starts the engine. As soon as

the engine has started, release the key. It

automatically returns to the ON position.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

WSD0052

5-12 Starting and driving

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so

equipped), and windshield-washer fluid

as frequently as possible, or at least

whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Check that all doors are closed.

∙ Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten the seat belt and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the key is placed in the ON posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and au-

dible reminders” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Automatic transmission:

Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The shift lever cannot be moved out

of the P (Park) position and into any

of the other gear positions if the ig-

nition switch is placed in the OFF po-

sition or if the key is removed from

the ignition switch.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

Manual transmission:

Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De-

press the clutch pedal to the floor

while cranking the engine.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate unless the clutch pedal is fully

depressed.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by placing the

ignition switch in the START position.

Release the key when the engine

starts. If the engine starts, but fails to

run, repeat the above procedure.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and hold it and then crank the

engine. Release the key and the ac-

celerator pedal when the engine

starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Crank the engine for

5-6 seconds. After cranking the en-

gine, release the accelerator pedal.

Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by placing the

ignition in the START position. Re-

lease the key when the engine starts.

If the engine starts, but fails to run,

repeat the above procedure.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-13

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, turn the key off and wait

10 seconds before cranking again, oth-

erwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up. Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (A/T)

(if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), 3, 2 or 1.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

CAUTION

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

The A/T in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled to produce maximum power and

smooth operation.

The recommended operating procedures

for this transmission are shown on the fol-

lowing pages. Follow these procedures for

maximum vehicle performance and driv-

ing enjoyment.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-14 Starting and driving

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever into a driving

gear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually

start the vehicle in motion.

The automatic transmission is designed

so the foot brake pedal MUST be de-

pressed before shifting from P (Park) to

any drive position while the ignition

switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of the

other gear positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF posi-

tion.

To move the shift lever:

Press the button while depressing

the brake pedal

Press the button to shift

Shift without depressing the brake

pedal

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and move the shift lever out of

the P (Park) position.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position for any reason while the vehicle is

in N (Neutral), or any D (Drive) position, the

ignition switch cannot be placed in the

LOCK position and the key cannot be re-

moved from the ignition switch. Move the

shift lever to the P (Park) position, then the

ignition switch can be placed in the LOCK

position.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) position only when the ve-

hicle is completely stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped.

LSD0151

Starting and driving 5-15

The brake pedal should be depressed to

move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or

any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then move

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the R (Reverse) position only when the

vehicle is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)

position. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed to move the shift lever from P

(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to

R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

3 (Third gear)

Use this position for driving up and down

long slopes where engine braking would

be advantageous.

Do not downshift into the 3 position at

speeds over the following and do not ex-

ceed the following speeds in the 3 position.

2WD:

99 mph (160 km/h)

4H:

93 mph (150 km/h)

4LO:

34 mph (55 km/h)

2 (Second gear)

Use this position for hill climbing or engine

braking on downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 2 position at

speeds over the following and do not ex-

ceed the following speeds in the 2 position.

2WD:

62 mph (100 km/h)

4H:

59 mph (95 km/h)

4LO:

21 mph (35 km/h)

1(Lowgear)

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or slow driving through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-

ing on steep downhill grades.

Do not downshift into the 1 position at

speeds over the following and do not ex-

ceed the following speeds in the 1 position.

2WD:

37 mph (60 km/h)

4H:

37 mph (60 km/h)

4LO:

12 mph (20 km/h)

5-16 Starting and driving

Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift lever

may not be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion even with the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift lever, release the shift

lock. The shift lever can be moved to N

(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will

be locked unless the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position (for models with a

steering lock mechanism). This allows the

vehicle to be moved if the battery is dis-

charged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the

following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover as

shown.

4. Use a protective cloth on the tip of a

small screwdriver before inserting it in

the shift lock release slot and pushing

down.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift

lock release.

6. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition to unlock the steering wheel (for

models with a steering lock mecha-

nism).

7. Now the vehicle may be moved to the

desired location.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have the automatic transmission

system checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is de-

pressed, the stop lights may not work.

Malfunctioning stop lights could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

LSD0141

Starting and driving 5-17

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

Each time your vehicle is started, the trans-

mission is automatically “reset” to overdrive

ON.

ON: With the engine running and

the shift lever in the D (Drive)

position, the transmission up-

shifts into overdrive as vehicle

speed increases.

Overdrive does not engage until the en-

gine has reached operating tempera-

ture.

OFF: For driving up and down long

slopes where engine braking is

necessary push the overdrive

switch once. The Overdrive OFF

indicator light in the instrument

panel comes on at this time.

When cruising at a low speed or climbing a

gentle slope, you may feel uncomfortable

shift shocks as the transmission shifts into

and out of overdrive repeatedly. In this

case, depress the overdrive switch to turn

the overdrive off. The Overdrive OFF indica-

tor light in the instrument panel comes on

at this time.

When driving conditions change, depress

the overdrive switch to turn the overdrive

on.

Remember not to drive at high speeds for

extended periods of time with the over-

drive off. This reduces fuel economy.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

(if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Do not over-rev the engine when

shifting to a lower gear. This may

cause a loss of control or engine

damage.

CAUTION

∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch

pedal while driving. This may cause

clutch damage.

∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before

shifting to help prevent transmission

damage.

∙ Stop your vehicle completely before

shifting into R (Reverse).

∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running (for example, at a stop

light), shift to N (Neutral) and release

the clutch pedal with the foot brake

applied.

WSD0045

5-18 Starting and driving

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting or

downshifting, depress the clutch pedal

fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then

release the clutch slowly and smoothly.

To ensure smooth gear changes, fully de-

press the clutch pedal before operating the

shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully

depressed before the transmission is

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-

mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd,

3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th (if so equipped) gear in

sequence according to vehicle speed.

To back up,depress the shift lever and then

move it to the R (Reverse) position after

stopping the vehicle completely.

On the 5-speed manual transmission

model, you cannot shift directly from the

5th gear into R (Reverse). First shift into N

(Neutral), then in to R (Reverse) after stop-

ping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R

(Reverse) or 1 (First), shift into N (Neutral),

then release the clutch pedal. Fully depress

the clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re-

verse) or 1 (First).

If your vehicle is equipped with 4-wheel

drive, refer to “Transfer case shifting proce-

dures” in this section.

Suggested up-shift speeds

The following are suggested vehicle

speeds for shifting into a higher gear.

These suggestions relate to fuel economy

and vehicle performance. Actual upshift

speeds will vary according to road condi-

tions, the weather and individual driving

habits.

∙ For QR25DE 2-wheel drive models:

GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 11 (17)

2nd to 3rd 15 (24)

3rd to 4th 24 (38)

4th to 5th 35 (56)

5 - speed

WSD0154

6 - speed

LSD0148

Starting and driving 5-19

∙ For VQ40DE 4-wheel drive models and

4-wheel drive models (2H and 4H posi-

tion):

GEAR CHANGE mph (km/h)

1st to 2nd 11 (17)

2nd to 3rd 17 (27)

3rd to 4th 25 (40)

4th to 5th 32 (51)

5th to 6th 45 (72)

Suggested maximum speed in

each gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is

not running smoothly, or if you need to ac-

celerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggested

speed (shown below) in any gear. For level

road driving, use the highest gear sug-

gested for that speed. Always observe

posted speed limits, and drive according to

the road conditions, which will ensure safe

operation. Do not over-rev the engine

when shifting to a lower gear as it may

cause engine damage or loss of vehicle

control.

Allowable maximum speed in each gear:

2–wheel drive models (QR25DE engine)

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 34 (54)

2nd 58 (94)

3rd 89 (144)

4th —

5th —

2–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 35 (56)

2nd 60 (97)

3rd 87 (141)

4th —

5th —

4–wheel drive models (VQ40DE engine)

2H/4H position

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 33 (54)

2nd 58 (93)

3rd 84 (135)

4th —

5th —

6th —

4L position

GEAR mph (km/h)

1st 12 (20)

2nd 22 (35)

3rd 32 (51)

4th 43 (70)

5th 55 (89)

6th —

5-20 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

To engage: Pull the parking brake lever up

䊊

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Manual transmission models:

Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position.

Automatic transmission models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake

lever slightly, press the button 䊊

Band

lower the lever completely.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn-

ing light goes out.

LSD2755

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-21

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. ACCEL•RES switch

2. COAST•SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ON•OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically. The SET

indicator light in the instrument panel

then blinks to warn the driver.

∙ If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the

ON•OFF switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ The SET indicator light may blink when

the ON•OFF switch is turned on while

pushing the ACCEL•RES, COAST•SET, or

CANCEL switch (located on the steering

wheel). To properly set the cruise con-

trol system, use the following proce-

dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models,do not

shift into N (Neutral) without depress-

ing the clutch pedal when the cruise

control is set. Should this occur, depress

the clutch pedal and turn the ON•OFF

switch off immediately. Failure to do so

may cause engine damage.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON•OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light

in the instrument panel comes on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed,push the COAST-

•SET switch and release it. The SET indica-

tor light in the instrument panel comes on.

Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle maintains the set speed.

∙To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

LSD2753

CRUISE CONTROL

5-22 Starting and driving

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch; the SET indi-

cator light in the instrument panel goes

out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator

light goes out.

∙ Turn the ON•OFF switch off. Both the

CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator

light in the instrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed and the SET light in the instrument

panel goes out if:

∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal (if

so equipped) while pushing the ACCEL-

•RES or COAST•SET switch. The preset

speed is deleted from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You depress the clutch pedal (manual

transmission), or move the shift lever to

N (Neutral) (automatic transmission).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST•SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL•RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL•RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed

increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST•SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST•SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST•SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL•RES switch. The vehicle

returns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

Starting and driving 5-23

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 RPM.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

∙ Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles

(805 kilometers). Your engine, axle or

other parts could be damaged.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-24 Starting and driving

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll

Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

∙ For vehicles equipped with , use

4H or 4L position only when necessary.

4-wheel drive operation lowers fuel

economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-

tions” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

Starting and driving 5-25

WARNING

∙ For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result

in drivetrain damage or unexpected

vehicle movement which could result

in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

∙ Do not attempt to test a 4WD

equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dyna-

mometer (such as the dynamometers

used by some states for emissions

testing), or similar equipment even if

the other two wheels are raised off the

ground. Make sure you inform test fa-

cility personnel that your vehicle is

equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in drive-

train damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in seri-

ous vehicle damage or personal

injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or

4LO position on dry hard surface

roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in

4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary

noise, tire wear and increased fuel

consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on

when you are driving on dry hard sur-

face roads:

– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position for automatic

transmission vehicles, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position with the brake

pedal depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position for manual

transmission vehicles, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position with the clutch

pedal depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

TRANSFER CASE SHIFTING

PROCEDURES

The part-time 4WD system provides three

positions (2WD, 4H and 4LO), so you can

select the desired drive mode according to

the driving conditions.

USING 4–WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)

(if so equipped)

5-26 Starting and driving

2WD or 4WD shift procedure:

4WD Shift Switch

Position Wheels Driven

Indicator Light

Use Conditions 4WD Shift Procedure

4WD shift Transfer

4LO posi-

tion

2WD

Rear wheels Fordrivingondry,paved

roads (Economy drive)

Move the 4WD switch.

2WD <—> 4H

4WD shift indicator light will indicate transfer shift po-

sition engaged.

4 wheels Fordrivingonrocky,

sandy or snow-covered

roads

Neutral

May blink

Neutral disengages the

automatic transmission

(A/T) mechanical park-

ing lock, which will allow

the vehicle to roll. Do not

leave the transfer shift

position in N (Neutral).*2

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. For A/T vehicles: Shift the shift lever to the N

(Neutral) position with the brake pedal depressed.

For manual transmission (M/T) vehicles: Shift the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position with the

clutch depressed.

3. For A/T vehicles: Depress and turn the 4WD shift

switch to 4LO or 4H with the brake pedal de-

pressed.

For M/T vehicles: Depress and turn the 4WD

switch to 4LO or 4H with the clutch pedal de-

pressed.

THE TRANSFER CASE DOES NOT ENGAGE BETWEEN

4H AND 4LO (OR 4LO TO 4H) UNLESS YOU HAVE FIRST

STOPPED THE VEHICLE, DEPRESSED THE BRAKE

PEDAL AND MOVED THE SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL)

FOR A/T VEHICLES. FOR M/T VEHICLES YOU MUST

MOVE THE SHIFT LEVER TO N (NEUTRAL). *3

4LO

4 wheels

Illuminated

For use when maximum

power and traction is

required (for example, on

steep grades or rocky,

sandy, muddy roads)

*1: Before moving the shift lever from N (Neutral), wait until the transfer 4LO position indicator light stays on steady. This indicates that the

4WD shift procedure is completed and the transfer gear is correctly set in the 4LO position. If the vehicle is shifted into gear before the

indicator is on steady, the transfer gear may grind, not engage correctly or stay in the neutral position.

- If the 4WD warning light illuminates, perform the following procedure to return the transfer case to correct operating condition.

Starting and driving 5-27

1. Turn off the engine by turning the ignition switch off.

2. Start the engine.

- Check that the 4WD warning light turns off. If the 4WD warning light illuminates, have the system checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. Apply the parking brake, for A/T vehicles, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever to N (Neutral) position. For M/T vehicles,

move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position.

4. With the brake pedal depressed on A/T vehicles or with the clutch pedal depressed on M/T vehicles, move the 4WD shift switch to

the desired mode.

- Be sure to wait until the transfer gear change completes before shifting the shift lever from the N (Neutral) position.

*2: While changing in and out of 4LO, the ignition key must be on and the vehicle’s engine must be running for a shift to take place and for

the indicator lights (4WD shift and 4LO position indicator) to be operable. Otherwise, the shift will not take place and no indicator lights

will be on or flashing.

*3: Make sure the transfer 4LO position indicator light turns on when you shift the 4WD shift switch to 4LO. The indicator light will also

turn on when 4LO is selected. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” in this section.

5-28 Starting and driving

The transfer case 4WD shift switch is used

to select either 2WD or 4WD depending on

the driving conditions. There are three

types of drive modes available, 2WD, 4H and

4LO.

The 4WD shift switch electronically controls

the transfer case operation. Rotate the

switch to move between each mode, 2WD,

4H and 4LO.

To change into or out of 4LO, the vehicle

MUST be stationary, shift the shift lever

to N (Neutral), and for A/T vehicles de-

press the brake pedal or for M/T vehicles

depress the clutch pedal. The switch

must be depressed and turned when

changing into or out of 4LO.

WARNING

∙ When parking, apply the parking

brake before stopping the engine and

make sure that the 4WD shift indica-

tor light is on and the ATP warning

light goes off. Otherwise, the vehicle

could unexpectedly move even if the

A/T is in the P (Park) position.

∙ The transfer 4LO position indicator

light must stop blinking and remain

illuminated or turn off before shifting

the transmission into gear. If the shift

lever is shifted from the N (Neutral)

position to any other gear when the

transfer 4LO position indicator light is

blinking, the vehicle may move

unexpectedly.

CAUTION

∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

∙ The 4H position provides greater trac-

tion. Avoid excessive speed, as it will

cause increased fuel consumption

and higher oil temperatures, and

could damage drivetrain compo-

nents. Speeds over 62 mph

(100 km/h) in 4H is not recommended.

∙ The 4LO position provides maximum

power and traction. Avoid raising ve-

hicle speed excessively, as the maxi-

mum speed is approximately 31 mph

(50 km/h).

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch

when making a turn or reversing.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch (be-

tween 2WD and 4H) while driving on

steep downhill grades. Use the engine

brake and low A/T gears 2 (Second

gear) or 1 (Low gear), or M/T (1st gear

or 2nd gear) for engine braking.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

(between 2WD and 4H) with the rear

wheels spinning.

∙ Do not drive on dry hard surface roads

in the 4H or 4LO position. Driving on

dry hard surfaces in 4H or 4LO may

cause unnecessary noise and tire

wear. NISSAN recommends driving in

the 2WD position under these

conditions.

∙ The 4WD transfer case may not be

shifted between 4H and 4LO at low

ambient temperatures and the trans-

fer 4LO position indicator light may

blink even when the 4WD shift switch

is shifted. After driving for a while you

can change the 4WD transfer case be-

tween 4H and 4LO.

Starting and driving 5-29

When driving on rough roads:

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ Drive carefully according to the road

surface conditions.

When the vehicle is stuck:

∙ Set the 4WD shift switch to 4H or 4LO.

∙ Use the Electronic Locking Rear Differ-

ential (E-Lock) system (if so equipped).

Turn the switch ON while the vehicle is

stationary and apply the throttle to try

to free the vehicle.

∙ If it is difficult to free the vehicle, rock the

vehicle back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) gears.

∙ If the vehicle is stuck deep in mud, place

stones or wooden blocks under the

tires. Then try the recovery procedures

above. Tire chains may be effective.

CAUTION

∙ Do not spin the tires excessively. Tires

will sink deep into the mud, making it

difficult to free the vehicle.

∙ Avoid shifting gears with the engine

running at high speeds as this may

cause malfunction.

4WD shift switch operations

∙ Shift the 4WD shift switch to either the

2WD, 4H or 4LO position, depending on

driving conditions.

∙If the 4WD shift switch is operated

while making a turn, accelerating or

decelerating or if the key switch is

turned off while in the 4H or 4LO posi-

tion, you may feel a jolt. This is not

abnormal.

∙When the vehicle is stopped after

making a turn, you may feel a slight

jolt after the shift lever is shifted to N

(Neutral) or P (Park). This occurs be-

cause the transfer clutch is released

and not because of a malfunction.

CAUTION

∙ When driving straight, shift the 4WD

shift switch to the 2WD or 4H position.

Do not move the 4WD shift switch

when making a turn or reversing.

∙ Do not shift the 4WD shift switch

while driving on steep downhill

grades. Use the engine brake and low

automatic transmission gears 2 (Sec-

ond gear) or 1 (Low gear) or manual

transmission (1st gear or 2nd gear) for

engine braking.

∙ Do not operate the 4WD shift switch

with the rear wheels spinning.

∙ Before placing the 4WD shift switch in

the 4H position from 2WD, ensure the

vehicle speed is less than 62 mph

(100 km/h). Failure to do so can dam-

age the 4WD system.

∙ Never shift the 4WD shift switch be-

tween 4LO and 4H while driving.

LSD0145

5-30 Starting and driving

4WD shift indicator light

The 4WD shift indicator light is located in

the odometer display.

The light should turn off within 1 second

after placing the ignition switch in the ON

position.

While the engine is running, the 4WD shift

indicator light will illuminate the position

selected by the 4WD shift switch.

∙The 4WD shift indicator light may

blink while shifting from one drive

mode to the other. When the shifting

is completed, the 4WD shift indicator

light will come on.

∙ If the 4WD warning light comes on, the

4WD shift indicator light goes out.

CAUTION

If the 4WD shift indicator light indica-

tion changes to 2WD when the 4WD

shift switch is shifted to the 4H position

at low ambient temperatures, the 2WD

mode may be being engaged due to

malfunctioning drive system. If the in-

dicator does not return to normal and

the 4WD warning light comes on, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

4WD warning light

Warning light Comes on or

blinks when:

Comes on

There is a mal-

function in the

4–wheel drive

system

Blinks

slowly

The difference

in wheel rota-

tion is large

The 4WD warning light is located in the me-

ter.

The 4WD warning light comes on when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

It turns off soon after the engine is started.

If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD sys-

tem when the ignition switch is ON, the

warning light will either remain illuminated

or blink.

If the 4WD warning light comes on, the 4WD

shift indicator light goes out.

LSD0147

Starting and driving 5-31

A large difference between the diameters

of front and rear wheels will make the

warning light blink slowly (about once per

2 seconds). Change the 4WD shift switch

into 2WD and do not drive fast.

CAUTION

∙ If the warning light comes on or blinks

slowly during operation, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Shifting between 4H and 4LO is not

recommended when the 4WD warn-

ing light turns on.

∙ When the warning light comes on, the

2WD mode may be engaged even if

the 4WD shift switch is in 4H. Be espe-

cially careful when driving. If corre-

sponding parts are malfunctioning,

the 4WD mode will not be engaged

even if the 4WD shift switch is shifted.

∙ Do not drive the vehicle in the 4H or

4LO position on dry hard surface

roads. Driving on dry, hard surfaces in

4H or 4LO may cause unnecessary

noise, tire wear and increased fuel

consumption.

If the 4WD warning light turns on

when you are driving on dry hard sur-

face roads:

– In the 4H position, shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position for automatic

transmission vehicles, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position with the brake

pedal depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

– In the 4LO position for manual

transmission vehicles, stop the ve-

hicle and shift the shift lever to the

N (Neutral) position with the clutch

pedal depressed and shift the 4WD

shift switch to 2WD.

∙ If the warning light is still on after the

above operation, have your vehicle

checked as soon as possible. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ The transfer case may be damaged if

you continue driving with the warning

light blinking.

5-32 Starting and driving

The E-Lock system can provide additional

traction and should only be used when a

vehicle has become or is becoming stuck.

This system operates by electronically

“locking” the two rear drive wheels to-

gether, allowing them to turn at the same

speed. The system is used when it is not

possible to free a stuck vehicle even when

using the 4LO position (4-wheel drive ve-

hicles).

When added traction is required, activate

the E-Lock system by pushing the switch

ON. For additional information, refer to

“Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual. Once the

system fully engages, the indicator light in

the instrument panel will remain ON. When

the system is activated, both rear wheels

will engage, providing added traction.

The rear wheels may momentarily slip or

move to engage the system, and the sys-

tem will only engage up to approximately

4 mph (7 km/h). Once the vehicle is free, the

system should be turned OFF and driving

resumed.

The Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) system is dis-

abled and the ABS light illuminates when

the E-Lock system is ON. Also, the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system is disabled

and the light illuminates when the

E-Lock system is ON.

WARNING

∙ Never leave the E-Lock system ON

when driving on paved or hard-

surfaced roads. Turning the vehicle

may result in the rear wheels slipping

and result in an accident and personal

injury. After using the E-Lock system

to free the vehicle, turn the system

OFF.

∙ Use the E-Lock system only when

freeing a stuck vehicle.Try the 4LO po-

sition before using the E-Lock system.

Never use the E-Lock system on a slip-

pery road surface such as snow or ice

surface. Using the E-Lock system

when driving in these road conditions

may cause unexpected movement of

the vehicle during engine braking, ac-

celerating or turning, which may re-

sult in an accident and serious per-

sonal injury.

CAUTION

∙ After using the E-Lock system, turn

the switch OFF to prevent possible

damage to driveline components

from extended use.

∙ Do not drive the vehicle at speeds

faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) when

the system is engaged. Doing so could

damage drivetrain components.

∙ Do not turn on the E-lock system

while the tires are spinning. Doing so

could damage drivetrain

components.

ELECTRONIC LOCKING REAR

DIFFERENTIAL (E-Lock) SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-33

WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park) for

automatic transmission (A/T) models

or in an appropriate gear for manual

transmission (M/T) models. Failure to

do so could cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly or roll away and result

in an accident. Make sure the shift le-

ver has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved with-

out depressing the foot brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. M/T models:

Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)

position. When parking on an uphill

grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear.

A/T models:

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-34 Starting and driving

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position and remove the key.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-

draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-

sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks,

you will still have control of the vehicle.

However, much greater steering effort is

needed, especially in sharp turns and at

low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and stopping distance will

be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating, reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-35

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads,or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

5-36 Starting and driving

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

∙ The ABLS system uses automatic brak-

ing to transfer power from a slipping

drive wheel to the wheel on the same

axle with more traction. The ABLS sys-

tem applies braking to the slipping

wheel, which helps redirect power to

the other wheel.

∙ On 4WD models the ABLS system oper-

ates in both 4H and 4LO modes. If 4WD

mode is engaged, the ABLS system op-

erates for both drive axles. On 2WD ve-

hicles, the ABLS system operates on the

drive axle only.

∙ The ABLS system is always ON. In some

conditions, the system may automati-

cally turn the ABLS system off. If the sys-

tem is automatically turned off, normal

brake function will continue. ABLS will

function even when the VDC system is

turned OFF.

∙ The ABLS does not operate if both

wheels on a drive axle are slipping.

ACTIVE BRAKE LIMITED SLIP (ABLS)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-37

WARNING

∙ The ABLS system helps provide in-

creased traction, but will not prevent

accidents due to abrupt steering op-

eration or by careless driving or dan-

gerous driving practices. Reduce ve-

hicle speed and be especially careful

when driving and cornering on slip-

pery surfaces. Always drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN approved for your vehicle

or are extremely deteriorated, the

ABLS system may not operate prop-

erly. This could adversely affect ve-

hicle handling performance, and the

slip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the ABLS sys-

tem may not operate properly and the

slip indicator light may illuminate.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the ABLS system may not operate

properly and the slip indicator light

may illuminate.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ If the 4WD transfer case is shifted into

4LO the indicator light will come

on and the VDC system will be turned

off. For additional information, refer to

“Using 4–wheel drive (4WD)” in this sec-

tion.

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

5-38 Starting and driving

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator in the instrument panel flashes

so note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the indicator light will come on in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off when these indicator

lights are off.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The indicator illumi-

nates to indicate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to

prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and

the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

on when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may

illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-39

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator and light

may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both

the and indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the four wheels depending

on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and

the indicator and light

may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and indicator light may

illuminate.

5-40 Starting and driving

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle

speed when driving on steep downhill

grades. Always drive carefully and at-

tentively when using the hill descent

control system and decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal if necessary. Be especially care-

ful when driving on frozen, muddy or

extremely steep downhill roads. Fail-

ure to control vehicle speed may re-

sult in a loss of control of the vehicle

and possible serious injury or death.

∙ The hill descent control may not con-

trol the vehicle speed on a hill under

all load or road conditions. Always be

prepared to depress the brake pedal

to control vehicle speed. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

The hill descent control system helps

maintain vehicle speed when driving under

15-21 mph (25-35 km/h) on steeper down-

hill grades. Hill descent control is useful

when engine braking alone in 4H or 4L can-

not control vehicle speed. Hill descent con-

trol applies the vehicle brakes to control

vehicle speed allowing the driver to con-

centrate on steering while reducing the

burden of brake and accelerator operation.

∙ When additional braking is required on

steep downhill roads, activate the hill

descent control system by pushing the

switch on. For additional information,

refer to “Hill descent control switch” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

∙ Once the system is activated, the indi-

cator light will remain on in the instru-

ment panel. For additional information,

refer to “Hill descent control system ON

indicator light” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is de-

pressed while the hill descent control sys-

tem is on, the system will stop operating

temporarily. As soon as the accelerator or

brake pedal is released, the hill descent

control system begins to function again if

the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending

steep downhill grades, the hill descent con-

trol switch should be on and the shift lever

in 2 (Second gear) or 1 (Low gear) for engine

braking.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-41

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. De-

press the brake pedal when the ve-

hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-

pecially careful when stopped on a hill

on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards may result in a loss of control of

the vehicle and possible serious injury

or death.

∙ The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to roll backwards and may

result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

∙ The hill start assist may not prevent

the vehicle from rolling backwards on

a hill under all load or road conditions.

Always be prepared to depress the

brake pedal to prevent the vehicle

from rolling backwards. Failure to do

so may result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill

start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied. This helps prevents the

vehicle from rolling backward in the time it

takes the driver to release the brake pedal

and apply the accelerator.

Hill start assist will operate automatically

under the following conditions:

∙ The shift lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds.

After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and hill start assist will stop operating

completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the

shift lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P

(Park) or on a flat and level road.

WARNING

∙ Always turn and look back before

backing up. The RSS is not a substi-

tute for proper backing procedures.

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the Rear Sonar System as con-

tained in this section. Inclement

weather may affect the function of

the RSS; this may include reduced

performance or a false activation.

∙ This system is not designed to pre-

vent contact with small or moving

objects.

WSD0103

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if so

equipped) REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so

equipped)

5-42 Starting and driving

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle. The system will not detect

small objects below the bumper, and

may not detect objects close to the

bumper or on the ground.

∙ If your vehicle sustains damage to the

rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-

aligned or bent, the sensing zone may

be altered causing inaccurate mea-

surement of obstacles or false alarms.

The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of

obstacles near the rear bumper when the

shift lever is in R (Reverse). The system may

not detect objects at speeds above 3 mph

(5 km/h) and may not detect certain angu-

lar or moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft

(1.8 m) from the rear bumper with a de-

creased coverage area at the outer cor-

ners of the bumper (refer to the illustration

for approximate zone coverage areas). As

you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of

the tone increases. When the obstacle is

less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will

sound continuously. If the RSS detects a

stationary or receding object further than

10 in (25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle,

the tone will sound for only 3 seconds.

Once the system detects an object ap-

proaching, the tone will sound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the

shift lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the

ignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on the

instrument panel allows the driver to turn

the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off, the

ignition must be ON, and the shift lever in R

(Reverse). An indicator light on the switch

will illuminate when the system is turned

off. If the indicator light illuminates when

the RSS is not turned off, it may indicate a

malfunction in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear

bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and

large accumulations of dirt (do not clean

the sensors with sharp objects). If the sen-

sors are covered, it will affect the accuracy

of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole or use the re-

mote keyless entry key fob (if so equipped).

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-43

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-

ating the vehicle. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions.Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice,and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

5-44 Starting and driving

∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist

with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)

or lower.

WARNING

∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to

use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or

electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-

pending on outside temperatures, to

properly warm the engine coolant. Use

an appropriate timer to turn the engine

block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-45

MEMO

5-46 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

First aid kit (if so equipped) ......................6-2

Flat tire ..........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-3

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-4

Jump starting ..................................6-12

Push starting ...................................6-14

If your vehicle overheats........................6-14

Towing your vehicle ............................6-15

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-15

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle) ......................................6-19

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other

traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

The first aid kit is located in the under-seat

storage bins.

To access the first aid kit:

LIC0394

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)

6-2 In case of emergency

For King Cab® model, lift up the rear jump

seat and remove net to remove the first aid

kit. For additional information, refer to

“Jump Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

For Crew Cab model, lift up the rear bench

seat and remove the net to remove the first

aid kit. For additional information, refer to

“Folding the rear bench seat up” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-

tors tire pressure of all tires except the

spare. When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit, and the CHECK TIRE PRES (pres-

sure) warning message is displayed in the

odometer, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is be-

ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS

will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and Controls” section,

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and Driving” section

of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

King Cab® model

LCE0108

Crew Cab model

LCE0113

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If you have a

flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Shift the manual trans-

mission into R (Reverse), or the auto-

matic transmission into P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the manual trans-

mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or

the automatic transmission into P

(Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

6-4 In case of emergency

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

(King Cab® models)

The tool storage compartment is located

between the two rear jump seats.

1. Turn the knob from the lock to the un-

lock position and remove the lid from

the tool storage compartment.

2. Release the strap to remove the tool

bag.

LCE2142 LCE0109 LCE0110

In case of emergency 6-5

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the

storage location by inserting the wheel

nut wrench into the jack screw at the

top of the jack as shown. Turn the

wheel-nut wrench counterclockwise

as shown until the jack screw becomes

loose. Then loosen the jack with your

fingers until it becomes free.

4. Remove the jack.

5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reverse

steps 1 to 4.

Getting the spare tire and tools

(Crew Cab models)

The tools and tool bag are located behind

the rear bench seat.

1. Remove the head restraints/headrests

and fold the rear bench seat down. For

additional information, refer to “Folding

the rear bench seat down ” in the “Safe-

ty–Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this

manual.

2. Remove the tool bag and locate the

wheel-nut wrench.

3. Collapse the jack to remove it from the

storage location by inserting the

wheel-nut wrench into the jack screw

as shown and turning the wheel-nut

wrench towards you until the jack be-

comes loose. Then loosen the jack

screw with your fingers until it is free.

4. Remove the jack from behind the seat.

5. To reinstall the jack and tools, reverse

steps 1 to 4.

LCE2164 LCE2159 LCE2165

6-6 In case of emergency

Getting the spare tire and tools

(All models)

1. Seat the T-shaped end of the jacking

rod into the T-shaped opening of the

spare tire winch. Apply pressure to keep

the jacking rod engaged in the spare

tire winch and turn the jacking rod

counterclockwise to lower the spare

tire.

2. Once the spare tire is completely low-

ered, reach under the vehicle, remove

the retainer chain, and carefully slide

the tire from under the rear of the ve-

hicle.

3. To reinstall the wheel, remove the cen-

ter cap and insert the tire chain

through the wheel. Be sure the rubber

spacer is centered on the wheel before

lifting. Use the assembled jacking rod

to slowly rotate the winch clockwise to

raise the wheel to the vehicle.

NOTE:

Inspect the spacer every six years and

replace as necessary. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WCE0070

LCE2022

In case of emergency 6-7

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to center the spare tire sus-

pending plate on the wheel and then

lift the spare tire.

∙ Failure to use the spacer may allow

the chain to get stuck on the wheel

nut holes.

Removing bolt-on wheel caps (if

so equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could

result in personal injury.

The wheel cap 䊊

1is only attached with the

wheel nuts and is separate from the wheel

䊊

To remove the wheel cap, remove the

wheel nuts after the jack is securely sup-

porting the vehicle and the tire clears the

ground.

For additional information, refer to “Jacking

up vehicle and removing the damaged tire”

in this section.

Take care not to scratch the wheel cap or

wheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

LCE2367

6-8 In case of emergency

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

Always refer to the illustration for the cor-

rect placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by

turning counterclockwise with the

wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the

wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

WCE0152

In case of emergency 6-9

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head under

the arrow stamped on the side of the

frame or rear as shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. Install the assembled jacking rod into

the jack as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the

jacking lever and rod.Carefully raise the

vehicle until the tire clears the ground.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then re-

move the tire.

LCE0087

6-10 In case of emergency

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (䊊

1,䊊

2,䊊

3,䊊

4,䊊

5,䊊

until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illus-

trated (䊊

1,䊊

2,䊊

3,䊊

4,䊊

5,䊊

6). Lower the

vehicle completely .

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 620 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication inter-

val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label lo-

cated in the driver’s door opening.

5. Securely store the jacking equipment

in the vehicle and the flat tire under the

vehicle. For additional information

about storing the flat tire, refer to “Get-

ting the spare tire and tools” in this sec-

tion.

WCE0063

In case of emergency 6-11

WARNING

∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can be-

come dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ The automatic engine cooling fan (if

so equipped) may come on at any

time without warning, even if the igni-

tion switch is in the OFF position and

the engine is not running. To avoid in-

jury, keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-12 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-

sary electrical systems (lights, heater,

air conditioner, etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and

tight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start

the engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the ig-

nition switch in the OFF position and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-13

CAUTION

∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The

3-way catalyst may be damaged.

∙ Automatic transmission models can-

not be push-started or tow-started.

Attempting to do so may cause trans-

mission damage.

∙ For manual transmission models,

never try to start the vehicle by tow-

ing it. When the engine starts, the for-

ward surge could cause the vehicle to

collide with the tow vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the radia-

tor cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the

following steps.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual trans-

mission) or to P (Park) (automatic trans-

mission).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine. Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-14 In case of emergency

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan.The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running.

Add coolant to the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank if necessary. Have your ve-

hicle repaired. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional

and local regulations for towing must be

followed. Incorrect towing equipment

could damage your vehicle. Towing in-

structions are available from a NISSAN

dealer. Local service operators are gener-

ally familiar with the applicable laws and

procedures for towing. To assure proper

towing and to prevent accidental damage

to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends hav-

ing a service operator tow your vehicle. It is

advisable to have the service operator

carefully read the following precautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information, refer to “Flat

towing — 4WD with automatic transmis-

sion,” “Flat towing — 2WD with automatic

transmission” and “Flat towing — 2WD/4WD

with manual transmission” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-15

4WD models with automatic

transmission

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models equipped with

an automatic transmission with any of

the wheels on the ground as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transfer case and transmission.

LCE2141

6-16 In case of emergency

4WD models with manual

transmission

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

If you must use a pull behind tow truck put

the manual transmission in N (Neutral).

For 4WD vehicles, always tow with the

transfer case in the 2 HI position.

Your vehicle speed should never exceed

60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve-

hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle

the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-

tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

gine after every 500 miles of towing may

cause damage to the transmission’s inter-

nal parts.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-

sion models with the rear wheels on

the ground (if you do not use towing

dollies) or four wheels on the ground:

– Always release the parking brake.

– Move the transmission shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position

– For 4WD vehicles, always tow with

the transfer case in the 2 HI

position.

– Observe the following restricted

towing speeds and distances for

manual transmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles

(805 km)

When towing long distances or speeds in

excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the

propeller shaft before towing to prevent

damage to the transmission. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

more information.

LCE2310

In case of emergency 6-17

2WD models with automatic

transmission

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (rear) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

∙ Never tow automatic transmission

models with the rear wheels on the

ground or four wheels on the ground

(forward or backward), as this may

cause serious and expensive damage

to the transmission. If it is necessary

to tow the vehicle with the front

wheels raised always use towing dol-

lies under the rear wheels.

∙ When towing automatic transmission

models with the front wheels on the

ground or on towing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism (for

models with a steering lock

mechanism).

LCE2311

6-18 In case of emergency

2WD models with manual

transmission

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies

be used when towing your vehicle or place

the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus-

trated.

If you must use a pull behind tow truck put

the manual transmission in N (Neutral).

Your vehicle speed should never exceed

60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve-

hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle

the engine with the transmission in N (Neu-

tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en-

gine after every 500 miles of towing may

cause damage to the transmission’s inter-

nal parts.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ If you have to tow manual transmis-

sion models with the rear wheels on

the ground (if you do not use towing

dollies) or four wheels on the ground:

– Always release the parking brake.

– Move the transmission shift lever

to the N (Neutral) position

– Observe the following restricted

towing speeds and distances for

manual transmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles

(805 km)

When towing long distances or speeds in

excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the

propeller shaft before towing to prevent

damage to the transmission.For additional

information, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

There are two options to recover a stuck

vehicle: pulling and rocking. For additional

information regarding these options,

please refer to the following sections.

LCE2310

In case of emergency 6-19

Pulling a stuck vehicle

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

∙ Attach recovery devices only to main

structural members of the vehicle or

the recovery hooks.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive) (automatic trans-

mission models) or 1st (Low) and R

(Reverse) (manual transmission

models).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R and D (automatic

transmission models) or 1st and R

(manual transmission models).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 34 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

6-20 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-2

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3

Chromeparts................................7-3

Tire dressings ................................7-3

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-5

Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5

Seatbelts....................................7-6

Corrosion protection ............................ 7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There-

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing

the proper product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

Appearance and care 7-3

If you choose to use a tire dressing,take the

following precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-

faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and re-

sult in serious personal injury.

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

LAI2085

Appearance and care 7-5

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position (auto-

matic transmission models) or the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position (manual

transmission models) and with the

parking brake fully applied, position the

floor mat in the floorwell so that the

floor mat grommet holes are aligned

with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position (automatic

transmission models) or the shift lever

in the N (Neutral) position (manual

transmission models) and with the

parking brake applied, fully apply and

release all pedals. The floor mat must

not interfere with pedal operation or

prevent the pedal from returning to its

normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

Positioning hooks

LAI2042

7-6 Appearance and care

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you consult

a NISSAN dealer.

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations...........8-3

Engine cooling system ..........................8-5

Checking engine coolant level ................8-6

Changing engine coolant.....................8-6

Engine oil........................................8-7

Checking engine oil level .....................8-7

Changing engine oil ..........................8-8

Changing engine oil filter ....................8-10

5-speed Automatic Transmission

(if so equipped) Fluid (ATF) .......................8-11

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) .......................8-11

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..........8-12

Brake fluid ...................................8-12

Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..................8-12

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-13

Battery.........................................8-14

Jump starting ...............................8-15

Variable voltage control system ................8-16

Drive belt .......................................8-16

Spark plugs ....................................8-17

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-17

Air cleaner......................................8-18

In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-19

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-20

Cleaning ....................................8-20

Replacing ...................................8-20

Brakes..........................................8-21

Fuses...........................................8-22

Engine compartment .......................8-23

Passenger compartment....................8-24

Battery replacement ...........................8-25

Key fob (if so equipped) ......................8-26

Lights ..........................................8-27

Headlights...................................8-27

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-28

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-29

Wheels and tires................................8-31

Tire pressure ................................8-31

Tire labeling .................................8-34

Types of tires ................................8-37

Tire chains ..................................8-38

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-39

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. For manual trans-

mission models, move the shift lever

to N (Neutral). For Automatic Trans-

mission (A/T) move the shift lever to P

(Park)

∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced

because the fuel lines are under high

pressure even when the engine is off.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙

Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-

mission related component harness

connector disconnected while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/Fusible link box

3. Fuse box

4. Air cleaner

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Engine oil dipstick

7. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir

8. Drive belt location

9. Radiator cap

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

WDI0643

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VQ40DE engine

1. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

2. Fuse/Fusible link box

3. Fuse box

4. Engine oil filler cap

5. Engine oil dipstick

6. Brake and clutch (if so equipped)

fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Drive belt location

9. Radiator cap

10. Power steering fluid reservoir

11. Battery

12. Engine coolant reservoir

LII0167

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your ve-

hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-

trate following the directions on the

container. If an equivalent coolant

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s in-

structions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer

to the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant

to the MAX level 䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the en-

gine is hot. Serious burns could be

caused by high pressure fluid escap-

ing from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2831

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period,depending on the sever-

ity of operating conditions.

VQ40DE

LDI0437

QR25DE

LDI0467 LDI0371

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the en-

gine, and such damage is not covered

by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature, then

turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

VQ40DE

LDI2832

QR25DE

LDI2833

8-8 Do-it-yourself

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug 䊊

5. Remove the drain plug with a wrench

by turning it counterclockwise and

completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove

and replace it at this time. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

engine oil filter” in this section.

∙Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

∙Check your local regulations.

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a

new washer. Securely tighten the drain

plug with a wrench. Do not use exces-

sive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening,then install

the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain

and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends

on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to deter-

mine when the proper amount of oil is

in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-

rect as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

Do-it-yourself 8-9

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil

filter.

4. Unscrew 䊊

Athe plate covering the oil

filter exposing the filter. (For VQ40DE

engine)

5. Loosen the oil filter 䊊

Bwith an oil filter

wrench by turning it counterclockwise.

Then remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

6. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

Be sure to remove any old gasket mate-

rial remaining on the sealing surface of

the engine. Failure to do so could lead to

engine damage.

7. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

8. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

9. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

10. Install the plate covering the oil filter.

(For VQ40DE engine)

11. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil if necessary.

VQ40DE

LDI2834

QR25DE

LDI2865

8-10 Do-it-yourself

When checking or replacement is required,

it is recommend that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Use Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF. If

Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not

available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

may also be used.

∙ Using automatic transmission fluid

other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S

ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterio-

ration in driveability and automatic

transmission durability, and may

damage the automatic transmission,

which is not covered by the NISSAN

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

The specified automatic transmission fluid

is also described on caution labels located

in the engine compartment.

The fluid level should be checked using the

HOT MAX range on the power steering fluid

reservoir at fluid temperatures of 122° -

176°F (50° - 80°C) or using the COLD MAX

range on the power steering fluid reservoir

at fluid temperatures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add

Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent to HOT

MAX or COLD MAX depending on system

fluid temperature. Remove the cap and fill

through the opening.

CAUTION

∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.

∙ Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent

WDI0256

5-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION (if so equipped)

FLUID (ATF)

POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

Do-it-yourself 8-11

For additional information on brake fluid

specification, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake and

clutch (if so equipped) systems. The

use of improper fluids can damage

the brake and clutch system and af-

fect the vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous

and should be stored carefully in

marked containers out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

BRAKE FLUID

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If

the fluid level is below the MIN line 䊊

Bor the

brake warning light comes on, add Genu-

ine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or

equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

If fluid must be added frequently, the sys-

tem should be checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The

brake fluid reservoir is shared with the

clutch hydraulic system for manual trans-

missions. If the level is below the MIN line 䊊

or the brake warning light comes on, add

Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake

Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the

MAX line 䊊

A. If fluid must be added fre-

quently, the system should be checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LDI2835 LDI2835

BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)

FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid

when the low windshield-washer fluid

warning light (if so equipped) comes on.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-

ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer solu-

tion. This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer res-

ervoir with washer fluid concentrates

at full strength. Some methyl alcohol

based washer fluid concentrates may

permanently stain the grille if spilled

while filling the windshield-washer

reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the windshield-washer res-

ervoir. Do not use the windshield-

washer reservoir to mix the washer

fluid concentrate and water.

LDI3136

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-13

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Any corrosion should be washed off

with a solution of baking soda and wa-

ter.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for

30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent

discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury.Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

BATTERY

8-14 Do-it-yourself

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect

the battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only dis-

tilled water to bring the level up to the

bottom of the filler opening. Do not

overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WDI0224

WDI0529

Do-it-yourself 8-15

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

The current sensor 䊊

Ais located near the

battery along the negative battery cable. If

you add electrical accessories to your ve-

hicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable

body ground such as the frame or engine

block area.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley

2. Automatic belt tensioner pulley

3. Cooling fan pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor pulley

5. Crankshaft pulley

6. Generator pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position before servicing drive

belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

LDI3236

VQ40DE

WDI0639

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM DRIVE BELT

8-16 Do-it-yourself

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If

the belt is in poor condition or is loose,

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule found

in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

1. Power steering fluid pump pulley

2. Water pump pulley

3. Air conditioner compressor pulley

4. Crankshaft pulley

5. Generator pulley

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

(QR25DE models)

It is not necessary to replace platinum-

tipped 䊊

Aspark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual. Do not service

platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

QR25DE

LDI0461 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

Do-it-yourself 8-17

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

(VQ40DE models)

It is not necessary to replace iridium-

tipped 䊊

Aspark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the "Maintenance and sched-

ules" section of this manual. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned

and reused. Replace it according to the

maintenance log shown in the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual. When replacing the filter, wipe the

inside of the air cleaner filter housing and

the cover with a damp cloth.

To remove the VQ40DE air cleaner filter:

䊊

1Unlatch the clips and remove the air

cleaner cover. Remove the air cleaner

filter.

To remove the QR25DE air cleaner filter:

1. Unlatch the clips 䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

2. Push down half of air cleaner to clear

the bottom retainers.

3. Lift up on half of air cleaner to remove

the air cleaner filter

VQ40DE

WDI0686

QR25DE

LDI0465

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops the

flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t

there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with the

air cleaner removed, and be careful

when working on the engine with the

air cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury. IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry

of airborne dust and pollen particles and

reduces some objectionable outside

odors. The filter is located behind the glove

box. For additional information on change

intervals, refer to the "Maintenance and

schedules" section of this manual.

To replace the filter, perform the following

procedure:

1. Open the glove box and press in on the

sides so that it will open completely al-

lowing it to hang by the cord.

2. Gently lift up on the tab 䊊

3. Pull the filter cover toward you and then

down 䊊

4. Remove the old filter 䊊

NOTE:

The filter is marked with air flow arrows.

The end of the filter with the arrow

should face the rear of the vehicle. The

arrows should face downward.

5. Insert the new filter into the housing

and slide it over to the right.

LDI0442 LDI2047

Do-it-yourself 8-19

6. Replace the filter cover. The cover will

click into place under the tab.

7. Install the glove box door.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield-washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer solution or a mild detergent. Your

windshield is clean if beads do not form

when rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer solution or a mild de-

tergent. Then rinse the blades with clear

water. If your windshield is still not clear

after cleaning the blades and using the

wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push and hold the release tab 䊊

A, and

then move the wiper blade down 䊊

the wiper arm to remove.

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

LDI2725

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

∙ Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-

ful not to let wax get into the windshield-

washer nozzle . This may cause clogging or

improper windshield-washer operation. If

wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a

needle or small pin 䊊

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-

adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-

plied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

LDI3120

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information re-

garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-

propriate maintenance schedule informa-

tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊

Ais

used in the fuse boxes in the engine com-

partment. Type 䊊

Bis used in the passenger

compartment fuse box.

Type 䊊

Afuses are provided as spare fuses.

They are stored in the passenger compart-

ment fuse box.

Type 䊊

Afuses can be installed in the engine

compartment and passenger compart-

ment fuse boxes.

If a type 䊊

Afuse is used to replace a type 䊊

fuse, the type 䊊

Afuse will not be level with

the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration.

This will not affect the performance of the

fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the

fuse box securely.

Type 䊊

Bfuses cannot be installed in the

underhood fuse boxes. Only use type 䊊

fuses in the underhood fuse boxes.

LDI0455 LDI0457

FUSES

8-22 Do-it-yourself

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come

on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing

the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

The fuse puller is located in the center

of the fuse block in the passenger

compartment.

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a

new fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and fuses are in good condition, check

the fusible links. If any of these fusible links

are melted, replace with only Genuine

NISSAN parts.

LDI2838 LDI2826

Do-it-yourself 8-23

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall fuse box

cover.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LDI2839 LDI0456

8-24 Do-it-yourself

Extended storage switch

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, remove the extended storage switch

and check for an open fuse.

NOTE:

The extended storage switch is used for

long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-

tended storage switch is broken it is not

necessary to replace it. Replace only the

open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

How to replace the extended storage

switch:

1. To remove the extended storage

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in

the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the

OFF position.

3. Remove the fuse box cover.

4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊

Afound on

each side of the storage switch.

5. Pull the storage switch straight out

from the fuse box 䊊

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

LDI2736

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

Do-it-yourself 8-25

KEY FOB (if so equipped)

Replace the battery in the key fob as fol-

lows:

䊊

1Open the lid using a coin 䊊

䊊

2Remove the battery 䊊

䊊

3Install a new battery 䊊

Cwith the “+” fac-

ing down.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points

will seriously deplete the storage ca-

pacity.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as it could cause a

malfunction.

∙ When changing the battery, do not let

dust or oil get on the key fob.

∙ There is danger of explosion if a lithium

battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace

only with the same or equivalent type.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equivalent.

䊊

4Close the lid securely.

5. Press the button, then

the button two or three times to

check the key fob operation.

If the battery is removed for any reason

other than replacement, perform step 5.

∙An improperly disposed battery can

hurt the environment. Always con-

firm local regulations for battery dis-

posal.

∙The key fob is water-resistant; how-

ever, if it does get wet, immediately

wipe completely dry.

∙The operational range of the key fob

extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m)

from the vehicle. This range may vary

with conditions.

LDI0484

8-26 Do-it-yourself

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This devise complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

HEADLIGHTS

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb. A bulb can be replaced from in-

side the engine compartment without re-

moving the headlight assembly.

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE

HANDS.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the head-

light reflector for a long period of time

as dust, moisture and smoke may en-

ter the headlight body and affect the

performance of the headlight.

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb.When aiming adjustment

is necessary, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

LIGHTS

Do-it-yourself 8-27

Removing the headlight bulb

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative (-) battery

cable.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector

from the rear end of the bulb.

4. Turn the bulb retaining ring 䊊

Acounter-

clockwise until it is free from the head-

light reflector and then remove it.

5. Carefully remove the headlight bulb. Do

not shake or rotate the bulb 䊊

Bwhen

removing it.

Replacing the headlight bulb

1. Insert the bulb.

DO NOT TOUCH THE BULB WITH BARE

HANDS.

2. Install and tighten the bulb retainer.

∙ Be sure the lip of the bulb socket con-

tacts the headlight body.

3. Push the electrical connector into the

bulb plastic base until it snaps and

stops.

4. Connect the negative (-) battery cable.

5. Close the hood.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Replacing the fog light bulb

If fog light bulb replacement is required, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog

light for a long period of time as dust,

moisture and smoke may enter the

fog light body and affect the perfor-

mance of the fog light.

WDI0294

8-28 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly*

High/Low/Daytime running lights (if so

equipped) 60/55 HB5

Turn/Park 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 3.8 194

Fog lights* (if so equipped) 55 H11

Map light 8 —

Room light 8 —

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped) — —

High-mounted stop light/Cargo light* 12.8 912

Rear combination light*

Turn 27 3156AK

Stop/Tail 27/8 3157K

Back-up 18 921

License plate light* 5 W5W

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

*It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

1. Map light

2. Room light

3. High-mounted stop light/Cargo

light

4. License plate light

5. Rear combination light

6. Fog light (if so equipped)

7. Headlight assembly/Daytime run-

ning light

LDI0713

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens

and/or cover using a cloth and suitable tool.

: Indicates bulb removal

: Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth 䊊

1to protect the housing.

WDI0306

Map light

LDI0478

Rear combination light

WDI0300

8-30 Do-it-yourself

To replace the license plate light:

1. Apply force as shown in image to re-

move tension that locks bulb assembly

to the bumper.

2. Pivot bulb assembly away from bum-

per to release fully.

3. Rotate the bulb retainer as shown in

the image.

4. Pull the bulb out to remove and re-

place.

*Left side assembly is shown. Right

side assembly is mirror.

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It

monitors tire pressure of all tires ex-

cept the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning

message is displayed in the odom-

eter, one or more of your tires is sig-

nificantly under-inflated.

TPMS will activate only when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example, a flat tire while

driving).

License plate light

LDI3134

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-31

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in the

“Instruments and controls” section,

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”

section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

“Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire

and Loading Information label is af-

fixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-

hicle loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

䊊

3Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-

ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

䊊

5Tire size: Refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

6Spare tire size.

LDI2007

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape. If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Infla-

tion Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

240 kPa, 35 PSI

Spare Tire: Full size

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides the

Tire Identification Number (TIN) for

safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394

8-34 Do-it-yourself

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

Do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-

ers.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

Example

LDI2786

8-36 Do-it-yourself

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cause the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

to malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire wear

and may damage the transmission

and differential gears.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

Do-it-yourself 8-37

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S”

chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve-

hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear-

ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains

are designed to meet the minimum clear-

ances between the tire and the closest ve-

hicle suspension or body component re-

quired to accommodate the use of a

winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory equipped tire

size. Other types may damage your vehicle.

Use chain tensioners when recommended

by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with chains in such conditions can cause

damage to the various mechanisms of the

vehicle due to some overstress.

Use only the 2WD range when driving on

clear paved roads.

8-38 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

in this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

98 ft-lb (133 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

WDI0258 WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-39

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire

chain clearance, speedometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may

lead to accidents and could result in

serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally

equipped with four tires that were the

same size and you are only replacing

two of the four tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires

on the front axle may cause loss of

vehicle control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and per-

sonal injury.

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake discs. Such

interference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad wear. For additional information

on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute. The light will remain

on after 1 minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

8-40 Do-it-yourself

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires

on the front and rear axles which will

cause excessive tire wear and may

damage the transmission,transfer case

and differential gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-

mended that all four tires be replaced with

tires of the same size, brand, construction

and tread pattern. The tire pressure and

wheel alignment should also be checked

and corrected as necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Do-it-yourself 8-41

Spare tire (FULL SIZE TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a full

size spare that is a different size or brand

than the tires originally installed on the ve-

hicle. This full size spare tire is intended for

temporary use only and should be re-

placed at the first opportunity.

Observe the following precautions if the

FULL SIZE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could

be damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

To help reduce the risk of a crash which

may result in personal injury or death:

∙ The TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare tire

should be used for emergency use

only. It should be replaced with the

standard tire at the first opportunity

to avoid possible tire or differential

damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving. The vehicle driving perfor-

mance may be affected when driving

on wet or snow covered roads.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire is installed, the Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) will normally not

be affected.

∙ When the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire is installed, the following

systems may not work correctly:

– Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

– Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)

(if so equipped)

∙ Periodically check the TEMPORARY

FULL SIZE spare tire inflation pressure.

Always keep the TEMPORARY FULL

SIZE spare tire inflated to the pressure

specification shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

∙ With the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice,the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire should be used on the front

wheels and the original tire used on

the rear wheels. Use tire chains only

on the drive wheels.

∙ Do not use the TEMPORARY FULL SIZE

spare tire on other vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire at the same

time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional maintenance items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Standard maintenance..........................9-7

Emission control system maintenance .......9-8

Chassis & body maintenance................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-12

Severe driving conditions ....................9-12

Maintenance log ...............................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehicle

good mechanical condition, as well as its

emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance,as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-

grams. They are completely qualified to

work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-

gins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department can perform the

service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle should pull to either side while driving

on a straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may

be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-

ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-

way speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-

nism: On a fairly steep hill check that the

vehicle is held securely with the shift lever

in the P (Park) position without applying any

brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell.

The fluid should be at the bottom of the

filler opening. Vehicles operated in high

temperatures or under severe conditions

require frequent checks of the battery fluid

level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines

on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-

ately have the exhaust system inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold, with

the engine off. Check the lines for proper

attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances, otherwise rust may form on the

floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the

exhaust system. At the end of winter, the

underbody should be thoroughly flushed

with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accu-

mulate. For additional information, refer to

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The

maintenance schedule indicates at which

mileage/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day opera-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-

vals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replac-

ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mix-

ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant

or the use of non-distilled water may re-

duce the recommended service interval

of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil

and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Evaporative emissions control vapor

lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-

ness. Tighten connections or replace parts

as necessary.

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.

Install new plugs of the same type as origi-

nally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,

deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any

deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-

ately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified

intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-

ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter

more frequently.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-

structions under “Explanation of general

maintenance items” in this section. When

rotating tires, check for damage and un-

even wear. Replace if necessary.

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil: Vi-

sually inspect for signs of leakage at speci-

fied intervals.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distances, such as police,

taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or using

a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform

such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and

intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brakelines&cables IIIIII

Brake pads & rotors夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1) I IIIII

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Differentialgearoil SeeNOTE(2)IIIIII

Transfer fluid See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD mod-

els)夝

IIIIII

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brakelines&cables IIIIII

Brake pads & rotors夝IIIIII

Brake fluid夝RRR

Automatic transmission fluid See NOTE (1) I IIIII

Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Differentialgearoil SeeNOTE(2)IIIIII

Transfer fluid See NOTE (2) I IIIII

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension

parts夝

III

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD mod-

els)夝

IIIIII

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If towing a trailer, using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles

(32,000 km) or 24 months. Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF (or their

equivalents) may cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic

transmission. Damage caused by the use of other fluids is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every

20,000 miles (32,000 km) or 24 months.

(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under

severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Towing a trailer, using a camper or a

car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation

(for QR25DE engine models) .................10-4

Fuel recommendation

(for VQ40DE models) ........................10-6

Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel

recommendation (if so equipped) ...........10-9

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations ..........................10-11

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations ...................... 10-12

Specifications .................................10-13

Engine .....................................10-13

Wheels and tires............................10-14

Dimensions and weights ...................10-15

When traveling or registering in another

country........................................10-16

Vehicle identification ..........................10-16

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate .......................................10-16

Engine serial number.......................10-16

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........ 10-17

Emission control information label .........10-18

Tire and loading information label ..........10-18

Air conditioner specification label...........10-19

Installing front license plate....................10-19

Installing front license plate with

grommets..................................10-19

Installing front license plate without

grommets..................................10-19

Vehicle loading information ...................10-20

Terms ......................................10-20

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-21

Securing the load...........................10-22

Utili-track® channel system

(if so equipped) .............................10-23

Loading tips ................................10-28

Truck-camper loading information ............10-29

Crew cab models...........................10-29

King Cab® models ..........................10-29

Special Body vehicles.......................10-29

Location for center of gravity ...............10-29

Vehicle load weight capacity ...............10-30

Measurement of weights ...................10-30

Towing a trailer ................................10-30

Maximum load limits .......................10-31

Towing load/specification ..................10-34

Towing safety ..............................10-36

Flat towing – 4WD with automatic

transmission ...............................10-43

Flat towing – 2WD with automatic

transmission ...............................10-43

Flat towing – 2WD/4WD with manual

transmission ...............................10-43

Uniform tire quality grading....................10-44

Emission control system warranty.............10-45

Reporting safety defects ......................10-45

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test............................................10-46

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-47

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-48

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 80 L 21-1/8 gal 17-5/8 gal

• For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommenda-

tions (without Flexible Fuel Vehicle option)” or “Flexible

Fuel Vehicle (FFV) fuel recommendation (if so equipped)”

in this section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

*1: For additional

information, refer to

“Engine” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of

this manual.

QR25DE

With oil filter

change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent

motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity.

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation” in this section.

Without oil

filter change 4.3 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt

VQ40DE

With oil filter

change 5.1 L 5-3/8 qt 4-1/2 qt

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN” is

recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent

motor oil that matches the above grade and viscosity.

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation” in this section.

Without oil

filter change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt

Engine coolant

(with reservoir)

QR25DE 9.4 L 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/

Coolant (blue) or equivalent

VQ40DE 10.2 L 2-3/4 gal 2-1/4 gal

Manual transmission gear oil

5 M/T 2.9 L 3-1/8 qt 2-1/2 qt • Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ

Multi 75W-85

• If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ

Multi is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may

be used as a temporary replacement. However, use

Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ

Multi as soon as it is available.

6 M/T 4X2 4.0 L 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt

6 M/T 4X4 4.2 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Automatic transmission fluid Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section.

• Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

in NISSAN automatic transmissions. If Genuine NISSAN

Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF

may also be used. Do not mix with other fluids. Using flu-

ids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF

or Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may damage the auto-

matic transmission. Damage caused by the use of other

automatic transmission fluids is not covered under the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Transfer fluid 2.0 L 2-1/8 qt 1-3/4 qt

• Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF recommended

• Using fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF may

cause deterioration in driveability and transfer durability,

and may damage the transfer. Damage caused by the

use of other fluids is not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

Front final drive oil 0.85 L 1-3/4 pt 1-1/2 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5

80W-90 or equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

Rear final drive oil (except for 6 speed M/T or E-Lock ve-

hicles) 1.6 L 3-3/8 pt 2-7/8 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super-S GL-5

synthetic 75W-90 or equivalent

Rear final drive oil (for 6 speed M/T or E-Lock vehicles) 2.0 L 4-1/4 pt 3-1/2 pt • Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil synthetic 75W-140 or API

GL-5 synthetic gear oil, Viscosity SAE 75W-140

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) — — — • Genuine NISSAN PSF-II or equivalent.

Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*2 or

equivalent DOT 3

*2: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Technical and consumer information 10-3

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner speci-

fication label” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type R (KLH00-PAGR0)

or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner speci-

fication label” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.5 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate

Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for

QR25DE engine models)

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percent-

age for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition.Fail-

ure to correct the condition is misuse of

the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not re-

sponsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for

VQ40DE models)

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

10-6 Technical and consumer information

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control

devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,

please take the following precautions as

the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle

performance problems and/or fuel system

damage.

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

∙E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E-15 in your

vehicle. U.S. government regulations re-

quire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be

identified with small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbreviation

or the appropriate percentage for that re-

gion.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition.Fail-

ure to correct the condition is misuse of

the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not re-

sponsible.

10-8 Technical and consumer information

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV) FUEL

RECOMMENDATION (if so

equipped)

Your vehicle is designed to use (E-85) Fuel

Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded regular gaso-

line or any percentage of the two fuels

combined.

U.S.government regulations require Fuel

Ethanol dispensing pumps to have a

small, square, orange and black label

with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

CAUTION

Use of other fuels such as Fuel Metha-

nol may cause powertrain damage or a

loss of vehicle performance.

Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will cause damage to the three-way

catalyst.

General information

This information is for Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(FFV) only. FFV vehicles can be identified by

the fuel filler door label that states Ethanol

(E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This sec-

tion only covers those subjects that are

unique to Flexible Fuel Vehicles.

CAUTION

Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

WARNING

∙ Ethanol vapors are extremely flam-

mable and could cause serious per-

sonal injury.

∙ Never have any smoking materials lit

in or near the vehicle when removing

the fuel filler cap or filling the tank.

∙ Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent

and never use it near an open flame.

Fuel requirements

Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded

regular gasoline with an octane rating of at

least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re-

search octane number 91), or E-85 fuel, or

any mixture of these two.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

For the best starting and vehicle driveabil-

ity results, do not continually switch be-

tween E-85 and unleaded regular gasoline.

If you must switch fuels, NISSAN recom-

mends the following:

∙ do not switch when the fuel gauge indi-

cates less than 1/4 full

∙ add more than 5 gallons of fuel

∙ operate the vehicle immediately after

refueling for a period of at least 5 min-

utes

NOTE:

When the ambient temperature is above

90°F (32°C), you may experience hard

starting and rough idle following start

up even if the above recommendations

are followed.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it un-

suitable for use when ambient tempera-

tures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the range of

0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience

an increase in the time it takes for you en-

gine to start, and a deterioration in drivabil-

ity (sags and/or hesitations) until the en-

gine is fully warmed up.

Fuel consumption

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per

gallon than gasoline, you will experience an

increase in fuel consumption. You can ex-

pect your fuel mileage to decrease by

about 30% compared to gasoline opera-

tion.

Replacement parts

Many components in your Flexible Fuel Ve-

hicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible

with ethanol. Always be sure that your ve-

hicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-

patible parts.

CAUTION

Replacing fuel system components

with non-ethanol compatible compo-

nents can damage your vehicle and

may also affect the warranty coverage.

Maintenance

If you operate your vehicle using E-85 fuel,

follow the correct maintenance log shown

in the “Maintenance and schedules” sec-

tion of this manual.

CAUTION

Do not use ethanol mixture greater

than 85% in your vehicle. It will cause

difficulty in cold starting and may affect

driveability.

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

LTI2061

Technical and consumer information 10-11

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built.You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ towing a trailer

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

NISSAN A/C system oil Type R (KLH00-

PAGRO) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air con-

ditioning system and will require the re-

placement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service.

A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-

cians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system re-

frigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

10-12 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE

Model QR25DE VQ40DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.622 (95.5 x 92)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 151.82 (2,488) 241.27 (3,954)

Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

M/T

A/T in N (Neutral) position Refer to the “Emission control information label” on the underside of the hood.

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug Standard PLZKAR6A-11 DILFR5A-11 ( for non FFV models)

DILFR5A-11D (for FFV models)

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

Technical and consumer information 10-13

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel Type Offset in (mm) Size

Steel 0.79 (20) 15 x 6.5JJ

Steel 1.18 (30) 16 x 7JJ

Aluminum 1.18 (30) 16 x 7J

Aluminum 1.18 (30) 18 x 7.5J

Tires Size

235/75R15

P265/70R16

P265/75R16

P265/60R18

Spare tire Size

Steel Full size

Alloy 16” Full size

Alloy 18” P265/70R16

10-14 Technical and consumer information

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length

Short wheel base in (mm) 205.5 (5,220)

Long wheel base in (mm) 219.4 (5,574)

Overall width in (mm) 72.8 (1,850)

Overall height

With roof rack in (mm) 73.9 (1,878)

Without roof rack

S and SV I-4 King Cab® models in (mm) 68.7 (1,745)

SV, DR and Pro-4X King Cab® models in (mm) 69.7 (1,770)

Crew Cab models in (mm) 70.1 (1,780)

Track Width

Front and rear in (mm) 61.8 (1,570)

Wheelbase

Short wheel base in (mm) 126.0 (3,200)

Long wheel base in (mm) 139.7 (3,550)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer-

tification label” on the center pillar

between the driver’s side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-15

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The VIN plate is attached as shown. This

number is the identification for your vehicle

and is used in the vehicle registration.

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

LTI0085

QR25DE engine

LTI0130

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-16 Technical and consumer information

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-

cation label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

VQ40DE engine

LTI0127

Type A (if so equipped)

LTI0135

Type B (if so equipped)

WTI0099

Technical and consumer information 10-17

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label. The label is

located as shown.

LTI0133

Type A (if so equipped)

LTI2252

Type B (if so equipped)

WTI0100

10-18 Technical and consumer information

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed as shown.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

WITH GROMMETS

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate with grommets:

1. Make holes on the plastic finisher at the

location mark (small dimple) using a

0.37 in (9.5 mm) drill. Apply light pressure

to the drill. Insert two plastic grommets

provided. Install the license plate holder

using the two bolts (and washers) pro-

vided.

2. Mount the license plate using two M6-

14 mm bolts.

License plate bolt tightening torque:

3.8 - 4.7 ft-lb. (5.10 - 6.37 N·m)

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

WITHOUT GROMMETS

Use the following steps to mount the front

license plate without grommets:

1. Make a shallow hole in each plastic fin-

isher at the location mark (small

dimple) using a 0.31 in (8 mm) drill. To

avoid damaging the threads behind

the finisher, apply only light pressure to

the drill.

2. Mount the license plate bracket using

two 8 mm slotted hex head screws.

LTI0206 LTI0137

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

Technical and consumer information 10-19

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - maxi-

mum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

maximum combined weight of

occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

10-20 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. Both the

GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this

section.

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

Example

LTI2320

Technical and consumer information 10-21

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to deter-

mine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

GVWR or the GAWR for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to

“Measurement of weights” in this

section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the “Tire and Loading

Information label” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SECURING THE LOAD

For your convenience, tie down hooks (if so

equipped) are placed at each corner of the

truck box. These may be used to help se-

cure cargo loaded into the truck box.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

LTI0102

10-22 Technical and consumer information

∙ Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of

your vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the way

your vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause personal

injury.

UTILI-TRACK® CHANNEL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

1. Side channels

2. Header channel

3. Floor channels

WARNING

∙ Properly install and tighten the tie-

down cleats into the Utili-track® chan-

nel system. Also, do not attach any

rope or straps directly to the channel.

Failure to properly install the tie-

down cleats or attaching ropes or

straps directly to the channel can

cause the cargo to become unse-

cured. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause per-

sonal injury.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

The Utili-track® channel system allows you

to move tie-down clamps in the bed to the

best location to secure a load.

The tie-down cleats must be installed so

the clamp is properly seated in the notches

in the rail. If the tie-down cleat is not seated

in the notches, it will not be flush with the

rail and cannot be properly tightened. The

bolt in the center of the cleat must be tight-

ened hand tight (20 – 40 in-lbs.)

LTI2082

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Check the tightness of the tie-down cleat

periodically during a trip to make sure the

center bolt has not become loose.

Install the tie-down cleat as follows:

1. Remove the side channels by sliding

them out the back of the truck bed.

Properly store the side channels.

2. Loosen the center bolt completely.

3. Insert the cleat into the channel per-

pendicular to the channel as shown.

Then rotate the cleat clockwise 90° and

slide it to the desired location.

4. Position the cleat so the nubs on the

bottom fully seat into the channel de-

tents.

LTI0103

LTI0104

10-24 Technical and consumer information

5. There should be no gap between the

bottom of the cleat and the top of the

channel. Tighten the center bolt hand

tight (20-40 in-lbs.).

WTI0124

Technical and consumer information 10-25

CAUTION

∙ Install only one cleat per section of

channel.

∙ Applying loads at angles to the cleats

greater than 45° or loads greater than

150 lbs. (header and floor channels) or

200 lbs. (side channels) may cause

damage to the channel or bed.

LTI0106

10-26 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Do not install accessories over the gap

between the front and rear side chan-

nels. Doing this could affect the rear

structure in certain rear impacts, which

could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to prevent it from sliding or shift-

ing. Use the channel end stoppers to

help secure items in the channels from

sliding off the end of the truck bed.

Channel end stoppers (if so

equipped)

The channel end stoppers should be used

to help prevent accessories installed in the

channels from sliding or shifting off the end

of the truck bed.

1 correct installation, 2 incorrect installation

LTI0123 WTI0119

Technical and consumer information 10-27

They must be installed so they are properly

seated in the detents in the channel.

Install the channels end stoppers as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the channel protectors by slid-

ing them out the back of the truck bed.

Properly store the channel protectors.

2. Loosen the bolt on the center of the

end stopper with the provided wrench

and insert it into the channel.

3. Position the end stopper to the desired

location on the channel so the nubs on

the bottom of the end stopper fully

seat into the channel detents.

4. Tighten the bolt on the center of the

end stopper with the provided wrench.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure which could result in a seri-

ous accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

10-28 Technical and consumer information

CREW CAB MODELS

Crew Cab short wheel base models

should not be used to carry a slide-in

camper.

KING CAB® MODELS

This information is provided for you to

properly install a slide-in camper and is

based on the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration regulations. It is rec-

ommended that, before installing the

camper, you carefully read the following in-

formation and ensure that the camper

meets the specifications.

This information may not apply to some

Canada model vehicles.

SPECIAL BODY VEHICLES

Some vehicles are equipped with commer-

cial or camper bodies. However, this Own-

er’s Manual does not cover these options.

For additional information, refer to the

body manufacturer’s instruction manual.

LOCATION FOR CENTER OF

GRAVITY

The illustration indicates the recom-

mended cargo center of gravity location.

King Cab®:

L1 = 36.7 in (931 mm)

WARNING

Improper loading may be dangerous. If

a load is too far back, it can affect han-

dling characteristics. If a load is too far

forward, the front axle may be

overloaded.

When the truck is used to carry a slide-in

camper, the total cargo load of the truck

consists of the camper manufacturer’s

weight figure, plus:

∙ the weight of installed additional

camper equipment not included in the

camper manufacturer’s weight figure,

∙ the weight of camper cargo,

∙ and the weight of occupants in the

camper.

LTI0128 LTI0129

TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING

INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-29

The total cargo load should not exceed the

truck’s pay load weight rating and the

camper’s center of gravity should fall within

the truck’s recommended center of gravity

location when installed.

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading can

adversely affect vehicle handling, brak-

ing and performance and may lead to

accidents.

VEHICLE LOAD WEIGHT CAPACITY

The vehicle payload weight capacity

shown on the Tire and Loading Information

label, refer to “Tire and Loading Information

label” in this section, indicates the maxi-

mum total weight of passengers, optional

equipment (air conditioning, trailer hitch,

etc.) and cargo that your vehicle is de-

signed to carry.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the GVWR or the

GAWR for your vehicle. For additional infor-

mation, refer to ’’Vehicle loading informa-

tion’’ in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the Tire and Loading Information label.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the GAWR. The total of

the axle loads should not exceed the

GVWR. These ratings are given on

the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move

or remove items to bring all weights

below the ratings.

WARNING

∙ Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely af-

fect vehicle handling, braking and

performance and may lead to

accidents.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY FULL SIZE spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy

load for the first 500 mile (805 km).

Your engine, axle or other parts could

be damaged.

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that

you tow a trailer, do not drive over

50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make

starts at full throttle. This helps the

engine and other parts of your vehicle

wear in at the heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used

primarily to carry passengers and cargo.

Remember that towing a trailer places ad-

ditional loads on your vehicle’s engine,

drive train, steering, braking and other sys-

tems.

TOWING A TRAILER

10-30 Technical and consumer information

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is avail-

able on the website at

www.nissanusa.com. This guide includes

information on trailer towing capability and

the special equipment required for proper

towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed

the value specified in the “Towing

Load/Specification” chart found in this sec-

tion. The total trailer load equals trailer

weight plus its cargo weight.

∙When towing a trailer load of

3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg) or more, trailers

with a brake system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) should not exceed the value

specified in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of

the towing vehicle (including passengers

and cargo) plus the total trailer load. Tow-

ing loads greater than these or using im-

proper towing equipment could adversely

affect vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is

not only related to the maximum trailer

loads, but also the places you plan to tow.

Tow weights appropriate for level highway

driving may have to be reduced for low

traction situations (for example, on slippery

boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect

towing. For example, towing a heavy trailer

in high outside temperatures on graded

roads can affect engine performance and

cause overheating. The engine protection

mode, which helps reduce the chance of

engine damage, could activate and auto-

matically decrease engine power. Vehicle

speed may decrease under high load. Plan

your trip carefully to account for trailer and

vehicle load, weather and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced en-

gine power and vehicle speed. The re-

duced speed may be lower than other

traffic, which could increase the chance

of a collision. Be especially careful when

driving. If the vehicle cannot maintain a

safe driving speed,pull to the side of the

road in a safe area. Allow the engine to

cool and return to normal operation. For

additional information, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

LTI0161

Technical and consumer information 10-31

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from im-

proper towing procedures is not cov-

ered by NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight

distributing hitch, keep the tongue load be-

tween 10 - 15% of the total trailer load or use

the trailer tongue load specified by the

trailer manufacturer. The tongue load

must be within the maximum tongue load

limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue

load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo

to allow for proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/maximum Gross Axle

Weight (GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label. The GVW equals the

combined weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue

load and any other optional equipment. In

addition, front or rear GAW must not ex-

ceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label.

WTI0160 CA0036

10-32 Technical and consumer information

Towing capacities are calculated assum-

ing a base vehicle with driver and any op-

tions required to achieve the rating. Addi-

tional passengers, cargo and/or optional

equipment, such as the trailer hitch, will

add weight to the vehicle and reduce your

vehicle’s maximum towing capacity and

trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed

to confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR,

Front GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined

Weight Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be mea-

sured using platform type scales com-

monly found at truck stops, highway weigh

stations, building supply centers or salvage

yards.

To determine the available payload capac-

ity for tongue load, use the following proce-

dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all

of the passengers and cargo that are

normally in the vehicle when towing a

trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from

the GVWR. The remaining amount is

the available maximum tongue load.

To determine the available towing capacity,

use the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

"Towing Load/Specification" chart

found in this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight

from the GCWR.The remaining amount

is the available maximum towing ca-

pacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight,

weigh your trailer on a scale with all equip-

ment and cargo, that are normally in the

trailer when it is towed. Make sure the

Gross Trailer Weight is not more than the

Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown on the

trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the

scale to make sure the Front Gross Axle

Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight are not

more than Front Gross Axle Weight and

Rear Gross Axle Weight on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The

cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the speci-

fied ratings.

Example:

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale- including passengers, cargo

and hitch - 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg).

∙ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

from F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-

bel - 5,815 lbs. (2638 kg).

∙ Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification" chart

- 11,133 lbs. (5050 kg).

∙ Maximum Trailer towing capacity from

“Towing Load/Specification" chart -

6,100 lbs. (2767 kg).

Technical and consumer information 10-33

5,815 lbs. (2638 kg) GVWR

– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg) GVW

= 630 lbs. (286 kg) Available for tongue

weight

11,133 lbs. (5050 kg) GCWR

– 5,185 lbs. (2352 kg) GVW

= 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Capacity available for

towing

630 lbs. (286 kg) Available tongue

weight

/ 5,948 lbs. (2698 kg) Available capacity

= 10 % tongue weight

The available towing capacity may be less

than the maximum towing capacity due to

the passenger and cargo load in the ve-

hicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight

between 10 - 15 percent of the trailer weight

or within the trailer tongue load specifica-

tion recommended by the trailer manufac-

turer. If the tongue load becomes exces-

sive, rearrange the cargo to obtain the

proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification

shown in the “Towing Load/Specification”

chart even if the calculated available

tongue weight is greater than 15 percent. If

the calculated tongue weight is less than

10 percent, reduce the total trailer weight to

match the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are

within the required ratings.

Trailer frontal area

CAUTION

Exceeding the maximum trailer frontal

area specification may exceed the tow-

ing capacity of the vehicle. This may af-

fect the towing performance and lead

to vehicle damage.

The trailer frontal area affects the towing

load of a trailer. The frontal area is the total

area of the vehicle and trailer that is af-

fected by air resistance while towing. Do

not exceed the maximum trailer frontal

area specification shown in the "Towing

Load/Specification” chart. The frontal area

can be determined by multiplying the

width of the trailer by the height of the

trailer. For example, a trailer that is 8 feet

wide by 6 feet tall has a trailer frontal area of

48 square feet.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

WARNING

The towing capacities provided in this

manual are for general reference only.

The safe towing capacity of your vehicle

is affected by dealer and factory in-

stalled options and passenger and

cargo loads. You must weigh the vehicle

and trailer as described in this manual

to determine the actual vehicle towing

capacity. Do not exceed the published

maximum towing capacity or the GCWR

or the GVWR shown on the

FMVSS/CMVSS label. Doing so can re-

sult in an accident causing serious per-

sonal injury or property damage.

10-34 Technical and consumer information

King Cab® 2WD (4 cyl) King Cab® 2WD (6 cyl) King Cab® 4WD (6 cyl) Crew Cab 2WD Crew Cab 4WD

Maximum Towing Capacity*1,

*2, *3 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg) 6,500 lbs. (2,949 kg) 6,300 lbs. (2,858 kg) 6,300 lbs. (2,858 kg) 6,100 lbs. (2,767 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load*2, *3 350 lbs. (158 kg) 650 lbs. (295 kg) 630 lbs. (285 kg) 630 lbs. (285 kg) 610 lbs. (276 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined

Weight Rating 7,936 lbs. (3,600 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg) 11,230 lbs. (5,094 kg)

Maximum trailer frontal area 30sq feet (2.78 sq meters)

*1:

∙ The towing capacity is calculated using the SAE International SAE J2807 test method. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional

equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity.

∙ All towing above 1,000 lbs. (454 kg) requires the use of trailer brakes.

∙ NISSAN recommends the use of a tandem axle trailer whenever towing above 3,000 lbs. (1,361 kg).

*2: The maximum towing capacity when using the Genuine NISSAN step bumper as a ball mount is 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg) and 350 lbs. (158 kg)

tongue load.

*3: Use of a weight-distributing hitch system is recommended when towing over 5,000 lbs.

Technical and consumer information 10-35

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an op-

tional trailer tow package. The trailer tow

package includes a receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. This hitch is rated for the

maximum towing capacity of this vehicle

when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and

hitch ball that is rated for the trailer to be

towed. Genuine NISSAN ball mounts and

hitch balls are available from a NISSAN

dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the op-

tional trailer tow package, check the tow-

ing capacity of your bumper hitch or

receiver-type frame mounted hitch.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and

trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is

available from a NISSAN dealer. Make sure

the trailer hitch is securely attached to the

vehicle to help avoid personal injury or

property damage due to sway caused by

crosswinds, rough road surfaces or pass-

ing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-

pable of towing a trailer heavier than

the weight rating of the hitch compo-

nents. Never exceed the weight rating

of the hitch components. Doing so can

cause serious personal injury or prop-

erty damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and

weight rating for your trailer:

∙ The required hitch ball size is stamped

on most trailer couplers. Most hitch

balls also have the size printed on the

top of the ball.

∙ Choose the proper class hitch ball

based on the trailer weight.

∙ The diameter of the threaded shank of

the hitch ball must be matched to the

ball mount hole diameter. The hitch ball

shank should be no more than 1/16”

smaller than the hole in the ball mount.

∙ The threaded shank of the hitch ball

must be long enough to be properly

secured to the ball mount.There should

be at least 2 threads showing beyond

the lock washer and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount

and the ball mount is inserted into the

hitch receiver. Choose a proper class ball

mount based on the trailer weight. Addi-

tionally, the ball mount should be chosen to

keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

10-36 Technical and consumer information

Bumper towing

The Genuine NISSAN step bumper has pro-

visions to install a trailer hitch ball and is

designed to tow trailers of a maximum

weight of 3,500 lbs. (1,588 kg).

To install a trailer hitch ball cut out the circle

in the center of the step bumper 䊊

A, then

remove it to install the trailer hitch ball.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball

mount is one that is designed to carry the

whole amount of tongue weight and gross

weight directly on the ball mount and on

the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-

leveling” or “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars

attach to the ball mount and to the trailer

to distribute the tongue weight (hitch

weight) of your trailer. Many vehicles can’t

carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue

weight transferred through the frame and

pushing down on the front wheels. This

gives stability to the tow vehicle.

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class

IV) is recommended if you plan to tow trail-

ers with a maximum weight over 5,000 lbs.

(2,268 kg). Check with the trailer and towing

equipment manufacturers to determine if

they recommend the use of a weight-

distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may

affect the operation of trailer surge

brakes. If you are considering use of a

weight-distributing hitch system with a

surge brake-equipped trailer, check with

the surge brake, hitch or trailer manufac-

turer to determine if and how this can be

done.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

weight-distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level sur-

face. With the ignition on and the doors

closed, allow the vehicle to stand for

several minutes so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point

on the front and rear bumpers at the

center of the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and ad-

just the hitch equalizers so that the

front bumper height is within 0 -

.5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of the reference

height measured in step 2. The rear

bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

LTI0132

Technical and consumer information 10-37

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If

the rear bumper is higher than the mea-

sured reference height when loaded,

the vehicle may handle unpredictably

which could cause a loss of vehicle con-

trol and cause serious personal injury or

property damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buf-

feting caused by other vehicles can affect

trailer handling. Sway control devices may

be used to help control these affects. If you

choose to use one, contact a reputable

trailer hitch supplier to make sure the sway

control device will work with the vehicle,

hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake system.

Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the

sway control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow

trailers of a maximum weight of 2,000 lbs.

(907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

3,500 lbs. (1,587 kg).

The Genuine NISSAN step bumper is con-

sidered a Class II ball mount.

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Class IV hitch

Class IV trailer hitch equipment (receiver,

ball mount and hitch ball) can be used to

tow trailers of a maximum weight of

10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg). A weight distributing

hitch should be used to tow trailers that

weigh over 5,000 lbs. (2,268 kg).

Your vehicle may be equipped with Class IV

trailer hitch equipment that has a

10,000 lbs. (4,535 kg) maximum weight rat-

ing, but your vehicle is only capable of tow-

ing the maximum trailer weights shown in

the “Towing Load/Specification” chart in

this section.

CAUTION

∙ Special hitches which include frame

reinforcements are required for tow-

ing above 2,000 lbs. (907 kg). Suitable

Genuine NISSAN hitches, ball mounts

and hitch balls for pickup trucks and

sport utility vehicles are available at a

NISSAN dealer.

∙ The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-

absorbing bumper.

WARNING

∙ Do not use axle-mounted hitches.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle exhaust

system, brake system, etc. to install a

trailer hitch.

∙ To reduce the possibility of additional

damage if your vehicle is struck from

the rear, where practical, remove the

receiver when not in use.

∙ Regularly check that all trailer hitch

mounting bolts are securely

mounted.

10-38 Technical and consumer information

Tire pressures

∙ When towing a trailer, inflate the

vehicle tires to the recom-

mended cold tire pressure indi-

cated on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label.

∙ Trailer tire condition, size, load rat-

ing and proper inflation pressure

should be in accordance with the

trailer and tire manufacturer’s

specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between

your vehicle and the trailer. The safety

chains should be crossed and should be

attached to the hitch, not to the vehicle

bumper or axle. The safety chains can be

attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is

mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turn-

ing corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available

power-type module/converter must be

used to provide power for all trailer

lighting. This unit uses the vehicle bat-

tery as a direct power source for all

trailer lights while using the vehicle tail

light, stop light and turn signal circuits

as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more

than 15 milliamps from the stop and tail

lamp circuits. Using a

module/converter that exceeds these

power requirements may damage the

vehicle’s electrical system. See a repu-

table trailer dealer to obtain the proper

equipment and to have it installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal

and/or local regulations. For assistance in

hooking up trailer lights,it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer or reputable

trailer dealer. Vehicles equipped with the

optional trailer tow package are equipped

with a 7-pin trailer harness connector. A flat

4–pin harness is available from your dealer

for vehicles without a tow package. If your

trailer is equipped with a flat 4-pin connec-

tor, an adapter will be needed to connect

the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters are

available at auto parts stores and hitch re-

tailers.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking

system, make sure it conforms to federal

and/or local regulations and that it is prop-

erly installed.

Vehicles equipped with a 7–pin trailer har-

ness connector are pre-wired for a trailer

brake controller. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for a trailer brake

adapter harness.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most

states require a separate braking system

on trailers with a loaded weight above a

specific amount. Make sure the trailer

meets the local regulations and the regu-

lations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are avail-

able.

Technical and consumer information 10-39

Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator is

mounted on the trailer tongue with a hy-

draulic line running to each trailer wheel.

Surge brakes are activated by the trailer

pushing against the hitch ball when the

tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic surge

brakes are common on rental trailers and

some boat trailers. In this type of system,

there is no hydraulic or electric connection

for brake operation between the tow ve-

hicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric braking

systems are activated by an electronic sig-

nal sent from a trailer brake controller (spe-

cial brake-sensing module). If electric trailer

brakes are used, refer to “Electric trailer

brake controller" in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towing

equipment make sure the trailer brakes are

properly installed and demonstrate proper

brake function testing.

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may

require the installation of an aftermarket

trailer brake controller.

A Genuine NISSAN jumper harness is avail-

able that is specifically designed to be used

when installing an aftermarket brake con-

troller.

Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake

controller according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Pre-towing tips

∙ Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or un-

loaded trailer is hitched.Do not drive the

vehicle if it has an abnormal nose-up or

nose-down condition; check for im-

proper tongue load,overload, worn sus-

pension or other possible causes of ei-

ther condition.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Keep the cargo load as low as possible

in the trailer to keep the trailer center of

gravity low.

∙ Load the trailer so approximately 60%

of the trailer load is in the front half and

40% is in the back half. Also make sure

the load is balanced side to side.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure,

vehicle tire pressure, trailer light opera-

tion, and trailer wheel lug nuts every

time you attach a trailer to the vehicle.

∙ Be certain your rearview mirrors con-

form to all federal, state or local regula-

tions. If not, install any mirrors required

for towing before driving the vehicle.

∙ Determine the overall height of the ve-

hicle and trailer so the required clear-

ance is known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding

of the vehicle’s behavior, you should prac-

tice turning, stopping and backing up in an

area which is free from traffic. Steering sta-

bility and braking performance will be

somewhat different than under normal

driving conditions.

∙ Always secure items in the trailer to pre-

vent load shift while driving.

∙ Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin

or lock to prevent the coupler from in-

advertently becoming unlatched.

∙ Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or

stops.

∙ Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

10-40 Technical and consumer information

∙ Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

∙ When backing up, hold the bottom of

the steering wheel with one hand. Move

your hand in the direction in which you

want the trailer to go. Make small cor-

rections and back up slowly. If possible,

have someone guide you when you are

backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle

and trailer when parking. Parking on a

slope is not recommended; however, if you

must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position before blocking the wheels

and applying the parking brake, trans-

mission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the

downhill side of the vehicle and trailer

wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place,

slowly release the brake pedal until the

blocks absorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Make sure the indicator light (if so

equipped) indicates the transfer case is

in 4H, 4L, or 2H and that the ATP light is

off. If the indicator light is flashing,

or the ATP light is ON, make sure the

transmission is in P (Park) (A/T) and

turn the 4WD switch to 2WD or 4H. For

additional information, refer to “Auto-

matic transmission park warning light”

in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion and “Using 4-wheel drive (4WD)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

7. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer

are clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the

blocks.

∙ While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may

decrease overall stability. Therefore, to

maintain adequate control, reduce your

speed and shift to a lower gear. Avoid

long or repeated use of the brakes

when descending a hill, as this reduces

their effectiveness and could cause

overheating. Shifting to a lower gear in-

stead provides “engine braking” and re-

duces the need to brake as frequently.

∙ If the engine coolant temperature rises

to a high temperature, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ Trailer towing requires more fuel than

normal circumstances.

∙ Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s

first 500 miles (805 km).

∙ For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

do tow, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ Have your vehicle serviced more often

than at intervals specified. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Mainte-

nance Schedules” in the “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual.

Technical and consumer information 10-41

∙ When making a turn, your trailer wheels

will be closer to the inside of the turn

than your vehicle wheels. To compen-

sate for this, make a larger than normal

turning radius during the turn.

∙ Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect vehicle/trailer handling,

possibly causing vehicle sway. When

being passed by larger vehicles, be pre-

pared for possible changes in cross-

winds that could affect vehicle han-

dling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to

sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal

to allow the vehicle to coast and steer

as straight ahead as the road condi-

tions allow. This combination will help

stabilize the vehicle

– Do not correct trailer sway by steer-

ing or applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently ap-

ply the brakes and pull to the side of the

road in a safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is

balanced as described in this section.

∙ Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires

considerably more distance than nor-

mal passing. Remember, the length of

the trailer must also pass the other ve-

hicle before you can safely change

lanes.

∙ Downshift the transmission to a lower

gear for engine braking when driving

down steep or long hills. This will help

slow the vehicle without applying the

brakes.

∙ Avoid holding the brake pedal down too

long or too frequently. This could cause

the brakes to overheat, resulting in re-

duced braking efficiency.

∙ Increase your following distance to al-

low for greater stopping distances

while towing a trailer. Anticipate stops

and brake gradually.

∙ NISSAN recommends that the cruise

control not be used while towing a

trailer.

∙ Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for ve-

hicles that are towing trailers. Obey the

local speed limits.

∙ Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness

connections, and trailer wheel lug nuts

after 50 miles (80 km) of travel and at

every break.

∙ When launching a boat, don’t allow the

water level to go over the exhaust tail

pipe or rear bumper.

∙ Make sure you disconnect the trailer

lights before backing the trailer into the

water or the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer

to the “Do-it-yourself” section in this

manual.

10-42 Technical and consumer information

FLAT TOWING – 4WD WITH

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes

called flat towing.

CAUTION

∙ DO NOT flat tow a 4WD vehicle

equipped with an automatic trans-

mission. Flat towing or using a vehicle

dolly WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-

sion parts due to lack of lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING – 2WD WITH

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

Towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes

called flat towing.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-

sion vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground. Doing so WILL DAMAGE inter-

nal transmission parts due to lack of

transmission lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-

matic transmission, an appropriate vehicle

dolly MUST be placed under the towed ve-

hicle’s drive wheels. Always follow the dolly

manufacturer’s recommendations when

using their product.

FLAT TOWING – 2WD/4WD WITH

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home, is sometimes

called flat towing.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

∙Always tow with the manual transmis-

sion in Neutral.

∙ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with

the transfer case in the 2 HI position.

∙ Your vehicle should never exceed

60 mph (97 km/h) when flat towing your

vehicle.

∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start

and idle the engine with the transmis-

sion in Neutral for two minutes. Failure

to idle the engine after every 500 miles

(805 km) of towing may cause damage

to the transmission’s internal parts.

Technical and consumer information 10-43

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

10-44 Technical and consumer information

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-

lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty

Information Booklet which comes with

your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a

Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost,

you may obtain a replacement by writing

to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-45

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be ob-

tained from Transport Canada’s

Road Safety Information Centre at

1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English

speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/

securiteroutiere (French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel

Drive (4WD) should never be tested us-

ing a two wheel dynamometer (such as

the dynamometers used by some

states for emissions testing), or similar

equipment. Make sure you inform the

test facility personnel that your vehicle

is equipped with 4WD before it is placed

on a dynamometer. Using the wrong

test equipment may result in transmis-

sion damage or unexpected vehicle

movement which could result in serious

vehicle damage or personal injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

10-46 Technical and consumer information

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an

EDR is to record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle,data

that will assist in understanding how a ve-

hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de-

signed to record data related to vehicle dy-

namics and safety systems for a short

period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-

cord such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-

trivial crash situation occurs; no data are

recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine the EDR

data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash in-

vestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment, can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

Technical and consumer information 10-47

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact your

nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-48 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

4WD.......................5-26

4WDwarninglight..............2-15

4-Wheel Drive .................5-26

5-Speed automatic transmission

fluid(ATF)....................8-11

Active Brake Limited Slip (ABLS)

system .....................5-37

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-74

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem)................1-81

Air bag warning labels ............1-89

Airbagwarninglight.........1-90, 2-20

Air bag warning light,

supplemental..............1-90, 2-20

Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation. . . . .4-21, 4-29

Air conditioner service ..........4-31

Air conditioner specification label . .10-19

Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations .......10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ...........10-12

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-17,4-29

Servicing air conditioner ........4-31

Air flow charts.................4-22

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .......2-25

Anchor point locations ...........1-34

Antenna ....................4-73

Antifreeze ...................5-43

Anti-lock brake warning light........2-15

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-36

Apps.......................4-73

Audible reminders ..............2-24

Audiosystem.................4-31

AMradioreception............4-32

Bluetooth® audio .........4-69,4-70

Compact disc (CD)

player.............4-44,4-50,4-57

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-40

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player................4-46,4-52

FMradioreception............4-32

iPod®Player.............4-63,4-65

iPod® player operation . . . . . .4-63, 4-65

Radio ....................4-31

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-72

Autolightswitch...............2-30

Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-51

Automatic transmission position

indicatorlight...............2-21

Driving with automatic

transmission................5-14

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ....3-16

Automatic door locks .............3-6

AUXjack....................4-58

Back button ...................4-7

Battery..................5-43,8-14

Charge warning light...........2-17

Battery replacement ............8-25

Keyfob................8-25,8-26

Before starting the engine .........5-13

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-16

Bluetooth® audio ...........4-69,4-70

Bluetooth® hands-free phone

system .....................4-92

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

without Navigation System ........4-80

Bluetooth® streaming audio with

NavigationSystem..............4-70

Booster seats .................1-68

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-36

Brakefluid.................8-12

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-29

Brakesystem...............5-35

Brakewarninglight............2-16

Brakewearindicators.......2-24, 8-21

Parking brake operation.........5-21

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-21

rakefluid...................8-12

Brakes......................8-21

Brakesystem.................5-35

Break-in schedule ..............5-24

Brightness/contrast button .........4-9

Brightness control

Instrument panel .............2-32

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-15

Bulb replacement ...............8-29

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargolightswitch...............2-34

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-20

Car phone or CB radio ............4-79

CDcareandcleaning.............4-71

CD player (See audio system) .4-44, 4-50, 4-57

Childrestraints........1-25, 1-26, 1-28, 1-31

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System..............1-31

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68

Top tether strap anchor point

locations...................1-34

Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-33

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6

Chimes, audible reminders .........2-24

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Clock set/adjustment .............4-7

Clock setting (models with Navigation

System)......................4-7

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System) . . . . . . . . . . .4-41, 4-43, 4-47, 4-49

Clutch

Clutchfluid.................8-12

Clutch interlock (clutch start) switch . . .2-38

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-17

Cold weather driving .............5-43

Compact disc (CD) player . . .4-44, 4-50, 4-57

Compass display ................2-11

Connect phone ................4-74

Console box ..................2-45

Control panel buttons .............4-4

Back button .................4-7

Brightness/contrast button .......4-9

Enterbutton.................4-4

Settingbutton................4-7

With navigation system . . . . . . .4-4, 4-5

Controls

Audio controls (steering wheel).....4-72

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-17,4-29

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruisecontrol.................5-22

Cupholders ..................2-46

Curtain side-impact and rollover air

bag........................1-87

Daytime Running Light System.......2-32

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-28

Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-28

Dimensions and weights ..........10-15

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-32

Display controls

(see control panel buttons) ..........4-4

Door locks ....................3-3

Door open warning light ...........2-17

Drivebelt ....................8-16

Driving

Coldweatherdriving...........5-43

Driving with automatic transmission .5-14

Driving with manual transmission . . .5-18

Precautions when starting and driving.5-2

Driving the vehicle ...............5-14

Economy - fuel.................5-25

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system......................5-33

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

systemswitch.................2-37

Emission control information label . . . .10-18

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-45

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-13

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Changing engine oil ............8-8

Changing engine oil filter.........8-10

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

11-2

Engine cooling system ..........8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-11

Engine oil pressure gauge ........2-8

Engine oil pressure warning light ....2-17

Engine oil viscosity ............10-11

Engine serial number ..........10-16

Engine specifications ..........10-13

Starting the engine ............5-13

Engine Block Heater .............5-45

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ..........2-8

Enterbutton...................4-4

EventDatarecorders............10-47

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

items.......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........8-25

Eyeglasscase.................2-45

Firstaidkit....................6-2

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) ....6-2

Flattire....................6-3,6-4

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-12

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Clutchfluid.................8-12

Engine coolant ...............8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Windshield-washer fluid .........8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-17

Foglightswitch................2-33

Four-Wheel Drive ...............5-26

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-81

Front power seat adjustment ........1-5

Frontseats....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy ...............5-25

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Fueloctanerating..........10-6,10-8

Fuel recommendation .......10-4,10-6

Loose fuel cap warning .......2-5,3-11

Fuel efficient driving tips ...........5-24

Fuel-filler door..................3-11

Fuel gauge ....................2-7

Fuses.......................8-22

Fusiblelinks...................8-23

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver

. . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Engine oil pressure gauge ........2-8

Fuel gauge ..................2-7

Odometer ..................2-4

Speedometer ................2-4

Tachometer .................2-6

Trip computer ................2-9

Trip odometer ................2-4

Voltmeter...................2-8

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-45

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-92

Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-29

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-29

Headlights ...................8-27

Headrestraints.................1-10

Heatedseats..................2-34

Heater

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-17,4-29

Heater operation ..........4-20,4-30

Hill descent control switch..........2-36

Hill descent control system .........5-41

Hill start assist system ............5-42

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . .2-55, 2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59

Hood release ..................3-10

Horn.......................2-33

Ignition switch .................5-10

Immobilizer system...........2-26,5-12

Important vehicle information label . . .10-17

In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-19

Increasing fuel economy...........5-25

11-3

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders) ...................2-20

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror .....3-16

Instrument brightness control .......2-32

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-32

Interiorlight...................2-54

iPod®Player...............4-63,4-65

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-31

Jumpseat.....................1-7

Jumpstarting..............6-12,8-15

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement.....8-25,8-26

Keyless entry

Without Intelligent Key system

(See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-7

Keys

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys......................3-2

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-19

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-17

Emission control information label . .10-18

Engine serial number ..........10-16

F.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-17

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-18

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-16

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-16

Warning labels (for SRS) .........1-89

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System................1-31

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-19

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-90, 2-20

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-29

Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-15

Bulb replacement .............8-29

Charge warning light ...........2-17

Exterior and Interior lights. . . . . . . .8-29

Foglights..................8-28

Foglightswitch..............2-33

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-29

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-29

Headlights .................8-27

Interiorlight.................2-54

Lightbulbs.................8-27

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-18

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-20

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-83

Security indicator light ..........2-23

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders..................2-20

Lights......................8-27

Maplights..................2-55

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Door locks ..................3-3

Power door locks ..............3-4

Loose fuel cap warning .........2-5,3-11

Lowfuelwarninglight ............2-18

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-18

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light........................2-20

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ........2-48

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-20

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-25

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-13

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions....................9-12

alfunction indicator light. . . . . . . . . .2-22

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3

Manual windows ...............2-49

Maplights....................2-55

Map pocket................2-40, 2-41

Meters and gauges...............2-3

Instrument brightness control .....2-32

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-16

Outsidemirrors...............3-17

11-4

Rearview...................3-15

Vanitymirror................3-15

Mirrors......................3-15

Mobile apps...................4-73

Moonroof ....................2-52

NissanConnect® ................4-73

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System..................2-26,5-12

NISSAN voice recognition system .....4-101

Octane rating

(See fuel octane rating). . . . . . . . .10-6, 10-8

Odometer ....................2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-8

Changing engine oil filter.........8-10

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-11

Engine oil viscosity ............10-11

One shot call ..............4-83,4-94

Outsidemirrors.................3-17

Overdriveswitch................5-18

Overhead sunglasses holder ........2-45

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-14

Owner's manual order form ........10-48

Owner's manual/service manual order

information..................10-48

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-21

Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-34

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-92

Power

Front seat adjustment ...........1-5

Power door locks ..............3-4

Poweroutlet................2-39

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Power steering system..........5-35

Powerwindows..............2-50

Rearpowerwindows...........2-51

Poweroutlet..................2-39

Powersteering.................5-35

Powersteeringfluid..............8-11

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions.................5-6

Precautions on booster

seats............1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-15

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-74

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Programmable features ............4-7

Push starting ..................6-14

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-79

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-40

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player.................4-46,4-52

Steering wheel audio control

switch....................4-72

Readiness for inspection

maintenance (I/M) test ...........10-46

Rearpowerwindows.............2-51

Rearseat.....................1-6

Rearslidingwindow..............2-52

Rear sonar system ..............5-42

Rear sonar system OFF switch .......2-39

Rearviewmirror................3-15

RearViewMonitor...............4-10

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch......................2-28

Rear window defroster switch . . . . . . .2-28

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-47

Refrigerant recommendation .......10-12

Registering a vehicle in another

country .....................10-16

Remote keyless entry system ......3-6,3-7

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-45

Roofrack....................2-48

11-5

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Childseatbelts.....1-28, 1-41, 1-56, 1-68

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-45

Seat

Jumpseat...................1-7

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3

Front power seat adjustment ......1-5

Seatback pockets ...............2-41

Seat belt

Childsafety.................1-25

Infants and small children ........1-26

InjuredPerson ...............1-18

Largerchildren...............1-27

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-15

Pregnant women .............1-18

Seat belt extenders ............1-24

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-25

Seatbelts................1-15, 7-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-24

Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-18

Seat belt extenders ..............1-24

Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-18, 2-20

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-2

Frontseats..................1-2

Heatedseats................2-34

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3

Rearseat...................1-6

Security indicator light ............2-23

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start ..........2-26,5-12

Security systems

Vehicle security system .........2-25

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Service manual order form ........10-48

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-31

Settingbutton..................4-7

Shifting

Automatic transmission .........5-15

Manual transmission ...........5-19

Shiftlockrelease................5-17

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-24

Side air bag system (See supplemental side

air bag, curtain and rollover air

bag systems) ..................1-87

Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-74

Smartphone connectivity ..........4-73

Sonar

Rear system ................5-42

Spark plug replacement ...........8-17

Spark plugs ...................8-17

Specifications .................10-13

Speedometer ..................2-4

SRS warning label ...............1-89

Stability control ................5-38

Standard maintenance ............9-7

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12, 8-15

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Push starting ................6-14

Starting the engine ............5-13

Starting the engine ..............5-13

Steering

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-35

Tilting steering wheel ...........3-14

Steering wheel .................3-14

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-72

Stoplight....................8-29

Storage.....................2-40

Storagetray...............2-42,2-43

Sunglasses case................2-45

Sunglasses holder ..............2-45

Sunroof (see Moonroof) ...........2-52

Sunvisors....................3-14

Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-89

Supplemental air bag warning

light....................1-90, 2-20

Supplemental front impact air bag

system......................1-81

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels . . . .1-89

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-74

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-74

Switch

Autolightswitch..............2-30

Automatic power window switch . . .2-51

Clutch interlock (clutch start)

switch....................2-38

Electronic locking rear differential (E-Lock)

system switch ...............2-37

Foglightswitch..............2-33

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-29

Headlightcontrolswitch.........2-29

Hill descent control switch. . . . . . . .2-36

Ignition switch ...............5-10

Instrument brightness control .....2-32

Overdriveswitch..............5-18

11-6

Power door lock switch ..........3-4

Rear sonar system OFF switch .....2-39

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-28

Rear window defroster switch . . . . .2-28

Turn signal switch .............2-32

Tachometer ...................2-6

Tailgate..................3-18, 3-18

Tailgatelatch...............3-22,3-23

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-6

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ...............2-26,5-12

Three-waycatalyst...............5-3

Tie down hooks ................3-23

Tilting steering wheel .............3-14

Tire

Flattire..................6-3,6-4

Spare tire ...............6-5,8-42

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-18

Tire chains .................8-38

Tire pressure .............8-31,8-31

Tirerotation................8-39

Tires of 4-wheel drive ...........8-41

Types of tires ................8-37

Uniform tire quality grading ......10-44

Wheels and tires ..........8-31,10-14

Wheel/tire size...............10-14

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-18

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). .5-3

Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-33

Towing

2-wheel drive models ...........6-19

4-wheel drive models ........6-17,6-18

Flattowing.................10-43

Towing load/specification .......10-34

Towtrucktowing .............6-15

Trailertowing...............10-30

Towingatrailer................10-30

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . .2-55,

2-56, 2-57, 2-58, 2-58, 2-59

Transmission

Driving with automatic

transmission ................5-14

Driving with manual transmission . . .5-18

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country).....................10-16

Trip computer ..................2-9

Trip odometer ..................2-4

Troubleshooting guide (NISSAN voice

recognition system) .............4-105

Truckbox.................3-18,3-18

Truck - camper loading ...........10-29

Turn signal switch ...............2-32

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-44

USB interface

Audio file operation ........4-60,4-62

Using four wheel drive (4WD) ........5-26

Vanitymirror..................3-15

Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-16

Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-15

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch......................2-35

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-38

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system. .5-38

Vehicle identification .............10-16

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-16

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-16

Vehicle immobilizer system......2-26,5-12

Vehicle loading information ........10-20

Vehiclerecovery................6-19

Vehicle security system ...........2-25

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-26, 5-12

Ventilators ....................4-17

Visors.......................3-14

Voice Prompt Interrupt ........4-83,4-94

Voice recognition system ..........4-101

Voltmeter.....................2-8

Warning

4WDwarninglight.............2-15

irbagwarninglight........1-90, 2-20

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-15

Battery charge warning light ......2-17

Brakewarninglight............2-16

Door open warning light .........2-17

Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-17

11-7

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Loose fuel cap warning .......2-5,3-11

Lowfuelwarninglight ..........2-18

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-18

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-20

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-83

Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-18, 2-20

Supplemental air bag warning

light..................1-90, 2-20

Vehicle security system .........2-25

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders..................2-20

Warning labels (for SRS) .........1-89

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders....................2-20

Audible reminders.............2-20

Indicatorlights...............2-20

Warninglights...............2-20

Warninglights.................2-20

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-14

Weights

(See dimensions and weights) .......10-15

Wheels and tires ............8-31,10-14

Wheel/tire size.................10-14

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-16

Windows ....................2-49

Locking passengers' windows .....2-51

Manual windows .............2-49

Powerwindows..............2-50

Rearpowerwindows...........2-51

Rearslidingwindow............2-52

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-13

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-20

Wiper

Wiper blades ................8-20

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-28

11-8

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for

QR25DE models):

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (for

VQ40DE models):

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control

devices and systems of the vehicle.

Damage caused by such fuel is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

FLEXIBLE FUEL VEHICLE (FFV)

FUEL RECOMMENDATION (if so

equipped):

If your vehicle is equipped as a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV) your vehicle is designed to

use (E-85) Fuel Ethanol, “Regular” unleaded

regular gasoline or any percentage of the

two fuels combined.

CAUTION

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

QR25DE engine models:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 5W-30 SN”

VQ40DE engine models:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil Ester 5W-30 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

For additional information, refer to “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

2018 Nissan Frontier | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation